s7 400 Module Data en-US en-US

Preface
General specifications 1
Rack 2
SIMATIC
Power supply modules 3
S7-400
S7-400 Automation System 4
Digital modules
Module Data
Analog modules 5
Reference Manual
Interface modules 6
S5 interface IM 463-2 7
Parameter sets of signal
modules A
Diagnostic data of signal
modules B
Accessories and spare parts C

Directive on handling
electrostatic sensitive D
devices (ESD)
List of abbreviations E
04/2023
A5E00850736-AL
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance
are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient
conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E00850736-AL Copyright © Siemens AG 2023.

Digital Industries Ⓟ 05/2023 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Purpose of this manual

The information contained in this manual can be used as a reference for operating, for
descriptions of the functions, and for the specifications of the signal modules, power supply
modules and interface modules of the S7-400.
How to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an S7-400 system is described in the
installation manuals for each system.
Basic knowledge required

This manual requires general knowledge of automation engineering.
In addition, you are required to know how to use computers or devices with similar functions
(e. g. programming devices) under Windows 2000 or XP operating systems. Since S7-400
is configured with the STEP 7 basic software, you have to have a good working knowledge
of the software. You can acquire this knowledge in the manual "Programming with STEP
7". Read the notes on the safety of electronic controllers in the appendix of the Installation
manual – especially when using an S7-400 in safety-relevant areas.
Target group
This manual is aimed at people with the required qualifications to commission, operate and
maintain the products described.
Scope of the manual

The manual applies to the S7-400 automation system.
Changes compared to the previous version

The following changes have been made compared to the previous version of this manual S7-400
Automation System; Module Specifications, Edition 05/2007 (A5E00850735-04):
• Standards and approvals have been updated
Approvals
You can find details on the standards and approvals in the General specifications
(Page 13)"General technical specifications" chapter.
S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Reference Manual, 04/2023, A5E00850736-AL 3
Preface
Position in the information landscape

This manual forms part of the S7-400 documentation.
System Documentation package

S7-400 • S7-400 automation system, installation
• S7-400 automation system, module specifications
• S7-400 automation system, CPU specifications
• S7-400 instruction list
Further Information
You can find further and additional information on the topics in this manual in the following
manuals:
Programming with STEP 7 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/18652056)
Configuring hardware and communication connections with STEP 7 (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/18652631)
System and standard functions (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
44240604)
PROFINET system description (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
19292127)
Recycling and disposal

The S7-400 is environmentally friendly and is thus recyclable. For environmentally compliant
recycling and disposal of your discarded device, please contact a company certified for the
disposal of electronic waste.
Additional support
If you have any questions relating to the products described in this manual and cannot find the
answers in this documentation, please contact your Siemens partner at the appropriate office or
sales and service location.
You will find information on who to contact at:
Contact (https://www.siemens.com/automation/partner)
A guide to the technical documents for the various SIMATIC products and systems is available
at:
Documentation (https://new.siemens.com/global/en/products/automation/process-control/
simatic-pcs-7/technical-documentation.html)
You can find the online catalog and order system under:
Catalog (https://mall.industry.siemens.com/)

4 Reference Manual, 04/2023, A5E00850736-AL
Preface
Training center
We offer a range of relevant courses to help you to get started with the SIMATIC S7 automation
system. Please contact your regional training center or our central training center in 90327
Nuremberg, Germany for details:
Training (https://www.sitrain-learning.siemens.com/)
Technical support
You can contact Technical Support for all Industry Automation products using the Web form for
Support Request
Support Request (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/my)
Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive knowledge base online on the
Internet at:
Service & Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/)
There you will find:
• Our newsletter containing up-to-date information on your products.
• The latest documents via our search function in Service & Support.
• An international forum where users and specialists can exchange their experiences.
• Your local contact partner for automation and drive technology in our contacts database.
• Information about on-site service, repairs and spare parts. Much more can be found under
"Services".
• Applications and tools for optimizing operations with SIMATIC S7. Performance
measurements for DP and PN, for example, are also published here.
See also
Standards, certificates and approvals (Page 13)
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary
and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation)
are in place.

Preface
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under
https://www.siemens.com/cert.

Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 General specifications ......................................................................................................................... 13
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals .................................................................................. 13
1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility ............................................................................................ 21
1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries..................................... 24
1.4 Mechanical and ambient conditions for S7-400 operation................................................... 25
1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection........................... 27
2 Rack...................................................................................................................................................... 29
2.1 Function and design of the racks ........................................................................................ 29
2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0) ............................. 31
2.3 The UR2-H rack (6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0).............................................................................. 33
2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0) ...................................................................................... 36
2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)...................................................................................... 38
2.6 The ER2 rack (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0) ................................................................................. 40
3 Power supply modules......................................................................................................................... 43
3.1 Common characteristics of the power supply modules........................................................ 43
3.2 Redundant power supply modules...................................................................................... 45
3.3 Backup battery (option) ..................................................................................................... 47
3.4 Operator controls and indicators ........................................................................................ 49
3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs............................................................................................. 52
3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0) .................................................. 58
3.7 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 10A R
(6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)..................................................................................................... 61
3.8 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)................................................. 64
3.9 Power supply module PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0) .................................................. 67
3.10 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R
(405-0KR02-0AA0) ............................................................................................................ 70
3.11 Power supply module PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0)................................................. 73
4 Digital modules.................................................................................................................................... 77
4.1 Module overview ............................................................................................................... 77
4.2 Steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module.................................................... 79
4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules ............................................................................ 79

Table of contents
4.3.1 Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 79

4.3.2 Parameters of digital input modules ................................................................................... 81
4.3.3 Parameters of digital output modules................................................................................. 82
4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules .......................................................................................... 82
4.4.1 General information about diagnostic messages................................................................. 82
4.4.2 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules........................................................................ 84
4.4.3 Causes of errors and remedies for digital modules .............................................................. 85
4.5 Interrupts of the digital modules ........................................................................................ 87
4.6 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs ......................................................................... 89
4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0) ............................... 91
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)............................... 94
4.8.1 Features ............................................................................................................................ 94
4.8.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V....................................................... 101
4.8.3 Behavior of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V .......................................................................... 103
4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0) ....................... 105
4.9.1 Features .......................................................................................................................... 105
4.9.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V.................................................. 109
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0).................... 112
4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0) ............................. 116
4.12 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0).................. 120
4.13 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0) ................ 124
4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)................. 127
4.14.1 Features .......................................................................................................................... 127
4.14.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A ............................................ 132
4.14.3 Behavior of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A................................................................ 133
4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)........... 134
4.16 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)....... 139
5 Analog modules................................................................................................................................. 143
5.1 General information......................................................................................................... 143
5.2 Module overview ............................................................................................................. 144
5.3 Steps for commissioning analog modules ......................................................................... 146
5.4 Representation of analog values....................................................................................... 146
5.4.1 General information......................................................................................................... 146
5.4.2 Representation of analog values of analog input channels ................................................ 148
5.4.3 Binary representation of input ranges............................................................................... 149
5.4.4 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges .......................................... 151
5.4.5 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges ..................................... 153
5.4.6 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors ............................................. 155
5.4.7 Representation of analog values for resistance thermometer ........................................... 156
5.4.8 Representation of analog values for thermocouples.......................................................... 159
5.4.9 Representation of analog values for analog output channels............................................. 164
5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels................................. 168

Table of contents
5.6 Behavior of the analog modules ....................................................................................... 171

5.6.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................... 171
5.6.2 Effect of supply voltage and operating mode .................................................................... 172
5.6.3 Effect of the value range for analog values ....................................................................... 173
5.6.4 Effect of operational limit and basic error limit.................................................................. 174
5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules...................................... 175
5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules ......................................................................... 178
5.8.1 General information about parameter assignment............................................................ 178
5.8.2 Parameters of analog input modules ................................................................................ 180
5.8.3 Parameters of analog output modules .............................................................................. 182
5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs ................................................................................ 183
5.10 Connecting voltage sensors ............................................................................................. 186
5.11 Connecting current sensors.............................................................................................. 187
5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors ........................................................... 190
5.13 Connecting thermocouples .............................................................................................. 192
5.14 Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs .................................................................. 197
5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs ................................................................. 198
5.16 Connecting loads/actuators to current outputs ................................................................. 200
5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules.......................................................................... 201
5.18 Interrupts of analog modules ........................................................................................... 205
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0).................................. 207
5.19.1 Features .......................................................................................................................... 207
5.19.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit ......................................................................... 213
5.19.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit.................................. 214
5.20.1 Features .......................................................................................................................... 215
5.21.1 Features .......................................................................................................................... 230
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)............................... 241
5.22.1 Features .......................................................................................................................... 241
5.22.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit ....................................................................... 247
5.22.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit................................ 248
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)............................... 250
5.23.1 Features .......................................................................................................................... 250
5.23.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit ....................................................................... 259
5.23.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit................................ 263
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0) ........................ 267
5.24.1 Features .......................................................................................................................... 267
5.24.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit ................................................................ 274

Table of contents
5.24.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit .................. 277
5.25.1 Features .......................................................................................................................... 278
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0).............................. 291
5.26.1 Features .......................................................................................................................... 291
5.26.2 Commissioning the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit ........................................................................ 297
5.26.3 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit ..................................................................... 298
6 Interface modules.............................................................................................................................. 299
6.1 Common features of the interface modules ...................................................................... 299
6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0 (6ES7
461-0AA01-0AA0) ........................................................................................................... 304
6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1
(6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)................................................................................................... 307
6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3
(6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0) .................................................................................................. 311
7 S5 interface IM 463-2......................................................................................................................... 315
7.1 Using SIMATIC S5 expansion units in an S7-400 ................................................................ 315
7.2 Rules for connecting S5 expansion units........................................................................... 317
7.3 Operator controls and indicators ...................................................................................... 318
7.4 Installing and connecting the IM 463-2 ............................................................................ 320
7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314 ...................................................................... 322
7.6 Configuring S5 modules for operation in the S7-400......................................................... 325
7.7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable ..................................................................................... 327
7.8 Terminating connector for IM 314 .................................................................................... 329
7.9 Specifications IM463-2 (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0) .............................................................. 331
A Parameter sets of signal modules...................................................................................................... 333
A.1 How to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program .............................. 333
A.2 Parameters of digital input modules ................................................................................. 335
A.3 Parameters of digital output modules............................................................................... 338
A.4 Parameters of analog input modules ................................................................................ 341
B Diagnostic data of signal modules .................................................................................................... 343
B.1 Evaluating diagnostic data of signal modules in the user program..................................... 343
B.2 Structure and contents of diagnostic data bytes 0 and 1 ................................................... 344
B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2 .................................................. 345
B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2 ................................................ 350
B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2 ................................................. 357

Table of contents
C Accessories and spare parts............................................................................................................... 365

C.1 Accessories and spare parts.............................................................................................. 365
D Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD).............................................................. 367
D.1 ESD: What are the directives for handling electrostatic sensitive devices? .......................... 367
D.2 Electrostatic charging of persons...................................................................................... 368
D.3 Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge.................................................. 369
E List of abbreviations .......................................................................................................................... 371
E.1 List of abbreviations......................................................................................................... 371
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 375
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 389

Table of contents

General specifications 1
1.1 Standards, certificates and approvals
Information on the nameplate
Note
Granted approvals on the nameplate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding marking is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the
markings on the nameplate.
WARNING
Open Equipment
Death, serious injury or substantial material damage can occur.
S7 400 modules are classified as open equipment, This means that the S7 400 should only be
installed in an enclosure or cabinet.
Access to the enclosures or cabinets should only be possible with a key or with a tool, and access
should only be permitted for trained or approved personnel.
IEC 61131-2
The S7-400 automation system meets the requirements and criteria of standard IEC 61131-2
(Programmable Controllers, Part 2: Equipment Requirements and Tests.)
CE marking
Our products meet the requirements and protective objectives of the following EU Directives
and comply with the corresponding European standards (EN):
• 2011/65/EU Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council of June 8, 2011 on the
restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment
(RoHS Directive)
• Directive 2014/35/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 2014 on
the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to the making available on the
market of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits (Low Voltage
Directive)

General specifications
the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive)
the harmonisation of the laws of the Member States relating to equipment and protective
systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres (ATEX Directive)
The EC Declaration of Conformity can be downloaded from the Customer Support Internet
pages (keyword "declaration of conformity").
UKCA marking
UKCA
Our products meet the requirements and protection goals of the following regulations and
related supplements:
• Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016 (Low Voltage)
• Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016 (EMC)
• Equipment and Protective Systems Intended for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres
Regulations 2016 (Explosion Protection)
• Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment
Regulations 2012 (RoHS)
The UK Declaration of Conformity can be downloaded from the Customer Support Internet
pages (keyword "declaration of conformity").
UKEX mark
UKEX
DEKRA 21UKEX0012 X
EN IEC 60079-0
EN IEC 60079-7 + A1
II 3 G Ex ec IIC T4 Gc
Importer UK:
Siemens plc
Manchester M20 2UR

CCC marking
CCC
GB/T 3836.3 (Explosive atmospheres-Part 3: Equipment protection by type of protection "e")
GB/T 3836.1 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 1: Equipment - General requirements)
Ex ec IIC T4 Gc
EMC directive
SIMATIC products are designed for industrial applications.
Table 1-1 Use in industry
Area of applica‐ Noise emission requirements Noise immunity requirements

tion
Industry EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-2
Low voltage directive

The products in the following table meet the requirements of EU Directive 2014/35/EU "Low
Voltage Directive". Compliance with this EU directive has been checked in accordance with
DIN EN 61131-2 (corresponds to IEC 61131-2).
Table 1-2 Products that fulfill the requirements of the low-voltage directive
Name Order number

Digital input module SM 421;DI 32 x UC 120 V 6ES7 421-1EL00-0AA0
Digital output module SM 422;DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2A 6ES7 422-1FH00-0AB0
Relay output module SM 422;DO 16 x UC30/230 V/Rel5A 6ES7 422-1HH00-0AA0
Digital input module SM 421;DI 16 x UC 120/230 V 6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0
PS 407 4A 6ES7 407-0DA02-0AA0
PS 407 10A 6ES7 407-0KA02-0AA0
PS 407 20A 6ES7 407-0RA02-0AA0
PS 407 10A R 6ES7 407-0KR02-0AA0
Note
In the new releases, some of the devices listed above fulfill the requirements of the explosion
protection guidelines instead of those of the low-voltage directive. Please note the information
on the nameplate.

ATEX approvals DEKRA 17ATEX0079 X, DEKRA 21ATEX0010 X, and DEKRA 21ATEX0049 X
Type examination certificate num‐ DEKRA 17ATEX0079 X DEKRA DEKRA

ber 21ATEX0010 X 21ATEX0049 X
Standards EN IEC 60079-0 EN 60079-0 EN IEC 60079-0
EN 60079-15 EN 60079-7 EN IEC 60079-7 +
A1
Marking II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc II3G Ex ec IIC T4 Gc II 3 G Ex ec IIC T4 Gc
The DEKRA The DEKRA The DEKRA
17ATEX0079 X certifi‐ 21ATEX0010 X cer‐ 21ATEX0049 X cer‐
cate is valid for the tificate is valid for tificate is valid for
"ATEX DEKRA the "ATEX DEKRA the "ATEX DEKRA
17ATEX0079 X (https:// 21ATEX0010 X 21ATEX0049 X
support.industry.siem (https:// (https://
ens.com/cs/ww/en/ support.industry.si support.industry.si
view/109795684)" emens.com/cs/ww emens.com/cs/ww
products listed in the /en/view/ /en/view/
certificate. 109795940)" 109811860)"
products listed in products listed in
the certificate. the certificate.
IECEx approvals IECEx DEK 17.0039X, IECEx DEK 21.0008X, and IECEx DEK 21.0031X
Certificate number IECEx DEK 17.0039 X IECEx DEK IECEx DEK

21.0008X 21.0031 X
Standards IEC 60079-0 IEC 60079-0 IEC 60079-0
IEC 60079-15 IEC 60079-7 IEC 60079-7
Marking Ex nA IIC T4 Gc Ex ec IIC T4 Gc Ex ec IIC T4 Gc
The IECEx DEK The IECEx DEK The IECEx DEK
17.0039X certificate is 21.0008X certifi‐ 21.0031X certifi‐
valid for the "IECEx DEK cate is valid for the cate is valid for the
17.0039X (https:// "IECEx DEK "IECEx DEK
support.industry.siem 21.0008X (https:// 21.0031X (https://
ens.com/cs/ww/en/ support.industry.si support.industry.si
view/109795682)" emens.com/cs/ww emens.com/cs/ww
products listed in the /en/view/ /en/view/
certificate. 109795939)" 109811862)"
products listed in products listed in
the certificate. the certificate.
Special conditions in potentially explosive atmospheres (applies to UKEX/CCC/ATEX/

IECEx):
• Within the operating range of the device, the maximum permissible pollution degree is 2
according to EN 60664-1 or GB/T 16935.1.
• The device must be installed in a suitable housing with at least protection class IP54
according to EN IEC 60079-0 or GB/T 3836.1. The ambient conditions must be taken into
account during use.
• Precautions must be taken to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by more than
119 V due to short-term mains disturbances.

Marking for Australia and New Zealand
Our products meet the requirements of standard EN 61000-6-4.
cULus approval
Note
The markings on the nameplate indicate which cULus approvals have been issued for your
product.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with

• UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
• CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
or cULus approval, Hazardous Location
HAZ. LOC.
CULUS Listed E248953 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.

• ISA 12.12.01 (Hazardous Location)
• CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for Use in
• Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D T4A
• Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4
Note the following information.

or cULus Approvals, Hazardous Location for Relay Modules
HAZ. LOC.
CULUS Listed E223122 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.

• UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
• CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for Use in
• Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP. A, B, C, D T4A
• Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP. IIC T4
• Cl. 1, Zone 2, AEx nC IIC T4
Note the following information.
Note
This product must be installed according to the NEC (National Electric Code) stipulations.
When used in environments according to class I, division 2 (see above), S7-400 must be
mounted in an enclosure that corresponds to at least IP54 according to EN 60529.
You can find information about the use of S7-400 in hazardous areas of zone 2 in a separate
document, which is included in this documentation package.
WARNING
Installation Instructions according cULus
WARNING – Explosion Hazard - Do not disconnect while circuit is live unless area is known to be
non-hazardous.
WARNING – Explosion Hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I,
Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C or D; Class I, Zone 2, Group
IIC, or non-hazardous locations only.

CuULu requirements for hazardous location on the battery power supply for CPUs
The backup voltage for a CPU must be supplied over a non-incendive plug connection. The
figure below shows such a plug connection.
1 2
(1) Battery or supply voltage

(2) CPU with "Ext. Batt." connector
Figure 1-1 Back-up voltage supply
The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics of this connection:
Voc (no load voltage) = 15 V Vmax = 15 V

Isc (short-circuit current)= 50 mA Imax = 50 mA
Ca = Battery/voltage supply capacity Ci = 25 nF maximum
La = Battery/voltage supply inductance Li = 2 mH maximum
The battery/power supply that powers the non-incendive connection must comply with the
following ratings:
Battery/Power supply CPU input "Ext. Batt." with cable

Voc ≤ Vmax (15 V)
Isc ≤ Imax (50 mA)
Ca ≥ Ci + Cc (25 nF + Cc)
La ≥ Li + Lc (2 mH + Lc)
Cc = Cable capacity
Lc = Cable inductance
Note
If you do not know the capacity and inductance of the cable, you can use the following values:
Cc = 197 pF/m (60 pF/ft.), Lc = 0.66 mH/m (0.2 mH/ft)
Example
The Varta 4022 battery together with a 1.5 m long cable and a Leonhardy 02-02.1500 plug meet
these conditions.
FM Approval
Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I, Division 2,

Group A, B, C, D.

Temperature class: T4 at 60° C ambient temperature
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage can result.
In hazardous areas, personal injury or property damage can result if you create or break an
electrical circuit during operation of an S7-400 (for example, by means of plug-in connections,
fuses, switches).
Do not create or break live electrical circuits unless you are certain there is no danger of
explosion.
When used in FM conditions, the S7-400 must be fitted in an enclosure that corresponds to at
least IP54 in accordance with EN 60529.
NEC (National Electric Code) and CEC (Canadian Electric Code) requirements for
Hazardous Locations for battery power supply for CPUs
The backup voltage for a CPU must be supplied over a non-incendive plug connection. The
figure below shows such a plug connection.
1 2
(1) Battery or supply voltage

(2) CPU with "Ext. Batt." connector
Figure 1-2 Back-up voltage supply
The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics of this connection:
Voc (no load voltage) = 15 V Vmax = 15 V

Isc (short-circuit current)= 50 mA Imax = 50 mA
Ca = Battery/voltage supply capacity Ci = 25 nF maximum
La = Battery/voltage supply inductance Li = 2 mH maximum
The battery/power supply that powers the non-incendive connection must comply with the
following ratings:
Battery/power supply CPU input "Ext. Batt." with cable

Voc ≤ Vmax (15 V)
Isc ≤ Imax (50 mA)
Ca ≥ Ci + Cc (25 nF + Cc)
La ≥ Li + Lc (2 mH + Lc)
Cc = Cable capacity
Lc = Cable inductance

1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
Note
The concept of non-incendive field wiring allows the interconnection of devices with non-
incendive field wiring using any wiring method approved for unclassified sites.
If you do not know the capacity and inductance of the cable, you can use the following values:
Cc = 197 pF/m (60 pF/ft.), Lc = 0.66 mH/m (0.2 mH/ft)
Marine Approvals
Classification societies:
• ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
• BV (Bureau Veritas)
• DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
• GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
• LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
• Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
Safety requirements for installation

The S7-400 automation system is "open-type equipment" in accordance with standard
IEC 61131-2 and therefore EU Directive 2014/35/EU (Low Voltage Directive), and "open type" in
accordance with UL/CSA certification.
To fulfill requirements for safe operation with regard to mechanical stability, flame
retardation, stability, and shock-hazard protection, the following alternative types of
installation are specified:
• Installation in a suitable cabinet
• Installation in a suitable housing
• Installation in a suitably equipped, enclosed operating area.
Introduction
This section provides details of the immunity of S7-400 modules and information on RFI
suppression.
All components of the S7-400 automation system meet the requirement of the standards
applicable in Europe provided the system is installed in accordance with all applicable
regulations (see Installation manual, sections 2 and 4).

"EMC" definition
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical device or system to operate
satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without affecting that environment.
WARNING
Personal injury or property damage can result.
Installing expansions that are not approved for the S7-400 can breach the requirements and
regulations governing safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.
Pulse-shaped interference
The table below shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the modules with pulse shaped
interference. The system S7-400 system must meet the requirements and guidelines for
electrical assembly.
Table 1-3 Pulse-shaped interference
Pulse-shaped interference Test voltage Corresponds to

immunity test
level
Electrostatic discharge Air discharge: ±8 kV 3
in accordance with IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: ±6 kV
Burst (electrical fast transient) in accord‐ 2 kV (power supply line) 3
ance with IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV (signal line >30 m)
1 kV (signal line <30 m)
Surge 3
in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5
• Asymmetrical connection 2 kV (supply line) DC with protective com‐
ponents
2 kV (signal line/data line only > 30 m),
where applicable with protective compo‐
nents
• Symmetrical connection 1 kV (supply line) DC with protective com‐
ponents
1 kV (signal line only > 30 m), where ap‐
plicable with protective components

Sinusoidal interference
The table below shows S7-400 module EMC for sinusoidal interference.
Table 1-4 Sinusoidal interference
Sinusoidal interference Test values Corresponds

to immunity
test level
High frequency radiation (electromagnetic 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4 GHz to 2 GHz
fields) 10 V/m with 80 % amplitude modulation
in accordance with IEC 61000-4-3 at 1 kHz 3
2 GHz to 2.7 GHz
3 V/m with 80 % amplitude modulation at
1 kHz
HF currents on cables and cable shielding Test voltage 10 V with 80 % amplitude 3
in accordance with IEC 61000-4-6 modulation of 1 kHz in a range of 10 kHz
to 80 MHz
Emission of radio frequency interference

Emissions from electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 61000-6-4.
Emissions over main AC supply in accordance with 61000-6-4.
Line harmonics
The AC power modules for S7-400 comply with the following standards for line harmonics:
Harmonic current: EN 61000-3-2
Voltage supply fluctuations and flicker: EN 61000-3-3
Additional measures
If you want to connect an S7-400 system to the public network, you must ensure compliance
with class B pursuant to EN 55032.
Appropriate additional measures are to be taken if you need to increase the immunity of the
system in the light of high external interference.

1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup batteries
1.3 Shipping and storage conditions for modules and backup

batteries
Transport and storage of modules

S7-400 modules exceed the requirements of IEC 61131-2 with regard to transport and storage
conditions. The following specifications apply for modules that are transported or stored in their
original packaging.
Table 1-5 Transport and storage conditions for modules
Permitted range
Free fall ≤ 1 m (up to 10 kg)
Temperature -40°C to +70 °C
Air pressure 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to a height of -1000 to 3500 m)
Relative humidity (at +25 °C) 5% to 95%, non-condensing
Sinusoidal oscillations according 5 - 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
to IEC 60068-2-6 9 - 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock according to IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks
Transport and buffer batteries

If possible, transport buffer batteries in their original packaging. No special measures are
required for the transport of the buffer batteries used in the S7-400 system. The lithium content
of the buffer battery is less than 0.5 g.
Storage of buffer batteries

Buffer batteries must be stored in a cool and dry place. The maximum storage period is 10 years.
WARNING
Danger of personal injury and property damage, danger of irritation by harmful
substances.
Incorrect handling can cause a lithium battery to explode, and incorrect disposal of old lithium
batteries can release harmful substances. It is therefore essential that you observe the
following instructions:
Do not throw new or discharged batteries into fire and do not solder on the cell body (max.
temperature 100 °C), also do not recharge - danger of explosion! Do not open batteries, only
replace them with identical types. Only obtain replacements from Siemens (for order number,
see Reference Manual "Module Data", Appendix C (Page 365)). This ensures that you have a
short-circuit-proof type.
If possible, old batteries should be given to battery manufacturers/recyclers or disposed of as
hazardous waste.

1.4 Mechanical and ambient conditions for S7-400 operation
Conditions of use
Without additional measures, the S7-400 must not be used, for example:
• at locations with a high degree of ionizing radiation
• in aggressive environments caused, for example, by
– the development of dust
– corrosive vapors or gases
– strong electric or magnetic fields
• in installations requiring special monitoring, for example
– elevators
– electrical installations in potentially hazardous areas
An additional measure can be installation of the S7-400 in a cabinet or in a housing, for
instance.
Mechanical environmental conditions

The following table shows the mechanical environmental conditions for S7-400 modules in the
form of sinusoidal vibrations.
Table 1-6 Mechanical environmental conditions
Frequency range in Hz Test values

10 ≤ f ≤ 58 0.075 mm amplitude
58 ≤ f ≤ 500 1 g constant acceleration
Reduction of vibrations
If the S7-400 is subject to big shocks or vibrations appropriate measures must be taken to reduce
the acceleration or the amplitude.
We recommend fixing the S7-400 on damping materials (rubber-metal anti-vibration
mountings, for example).

Checking mechanical environmental conditions

The following table provides information on the type and scope of checks regarding mechanical
environmental conditions.
Table 1-7 Checking Mechanical Environmental Conditions
Checking for ... Test standard Comments

vibrations Vibration test according to Type of vibration: Frequency sweeps with a sweep
IEC 60068-2-6 (sine) rate of 1 octave/minute.
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz, constant amplitude 0.075 mm
58 Hz ≤ f ≤ 500 Hz, constant acceleration 1g
Period of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in
each of the 3 axis which are vertical to each other.
Shock Shock test according to Type of shock: half-sine
IEC 60068-2-29 Strength of shock: 10g peak value, 6 ms duration
Shock direction: 100 frequency sweeps per axis in
each of the 3 axis which are vertical to each other.
Climatic environmental conditions

The S7-400 can be used in the following climatic ambient conditions:
Table 1-8 Climatic environmental conditions
Ambient conditions Permitted range Remark

Temperature 0 to +60 °C
Temperature change Max. 10 °C/h
Relative humidity Max. 95 % at +25 °C No condensation
Air pressure 1080 to 795 hPa (corresponds to a height of -1000
to 2000 m)
Contaminant concentration SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Test: 10 ppm; 21 days
RH < 60 %, no condensation Test: 1 ppm; 21 days
H2S: < 0.1 ppm;
RH < 60 %, no condensation
ISA-S71.04 severity level G1; G2; G3 -

1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection
1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of

protection
Test voltages
Where required, insulation resistance is proved in routine testing with test voltages in
accordance with IEC 61131-2.
Protection class
Protection class I in accordance with IEC 61140, i.e. protective conductor connection to power
module required!
Protection from foreign objects and water

IP20 in accordance with IEC 60529, i.e. protection against contact with standard probes.
There is no water ingress protection.

1.5 Information on insulation tests, protection class and degree of protection

Rack 2
2.1 Function and design of the racks
Introduction
The racks for the S7-400 have the following functions:
• They physically hold the modules.
• They supply the modules with operating voltage.
• They connect the individual modules to each other via the signal busses.
Design of the racks

A rack consists of the following elements:
• Mounting rail with threaded bolts for fixing the modules and lateral cutouts for mounting the
rack
• Plastic parts that function, among other things, as guides when swinging the modules into
place
• A backplane bus, an I/O bus and, if necessary, a communication bus with bus connector
• Connection for local ground
The following figure shows the mechanical configuration of a rack (UR1).
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
4
Figure 2-1 Configuration of a rack with 18 slots
(1) Mounting rail
(2) Plastic parts

Rack
2.1 Function and design of the racks
(3) Bus connector (covered when shipped)

(4) Connection for local ground
UL/CSA note
Special requirements should be taken into consideration in the area of influence of the UL/CSA;
these may be fulfilled by installing the system in a cabinet.

Rack
2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0)
2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2

(6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0)
Order number
The "x" variable has the following meaning for order numbers 6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0 and
6ES7400-1JAx1:
• x=0: Mounting rail made of sheet steel
• x=1: Mounting rail made of aluminum
Introduction
The UR1 and UR2 racks are used for setting up central racks and expansion racks. The UR1 and
UR2 racks have both an I/O bus and a communication bus.
Suitable modules for UR1 and UR2

You can use the following modules in the UR1 and UR2 racks:
• When the UR1 or UR2 is used as a central rack:
All S7-400 modules except receive IMs
• When the UR1 or UR2 is used as an expansion rack:
All S7-400 modules except CPUs and send IMs
Special case: Power supply modules must not be used together with the receive IM IM 461-1.
Design of the UR1 and UR2

1 2
NN NN
4 3
NN
NN NN
NN NN
(1)+(2) I/O bus

(3)+(4) Communication bus
Figure 2-2 UR1 rack with 18 slots and UR2 with 9 slots

Rack
2.2 The racks UR1 (6ES7400-1TAx1-0AA0) and UR2 (6ES7400-1JAx1-0AA0)
Specifications of the UR1 and UR2 racks
Article number 6ES7400-1TA01 6ES7400-1TA11 6ES7400-1JA01- 6ES7400-1JA11-

-0AA0 -0AA0 0AA0 0AA0
General information
Product type designa‐ UR1 UR2
tion
Hardware configuration
Rack
• Communication bus Yes
• P bus Yes
Slots
• Number of slots 18 9
Standards, approvals,
certificates
CE mark Yes
UKCA mark Yes
UL approval Yes
FM approval Yes
RCM (formerly C-TICK) Yes
KC approval Yes
EAC (formerly Gost-R) Yes
CCC Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
during operation
• min. 0 °C
• max. 60 °C
Ambient temperature
during storage/transpor‐
tation
• min. 0 °C
• max. 70 °C
Mechanics/material
rack profile material aluminum aluminum
Dimensions
Width 482.5 mm 257.5 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 27.5 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 4.1 kg 3 kg 2.15 kg 1.5 kg

Rack
2.3 The UR2-H rack (6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0)
Order number
In order number 6ES7400-2JAx0-0AA0, the "x" placeholder has the following meaning:
Introduction
The UR2-H rack is used for setting up two central racks or expansion racks in one rack. In
functional terms, the UR2-H rack represents two electrically isolated UR2 racks on the same
mounting rail. The UR2-H is mainly used for compact setup of redundant S7-400H systems (two
devices or systems in one rack).
Suitable modules for UR2-H

You can use the following modules in the UR2-H rack:
• When the UR2-H is used as a central rack:
All S7-400 modules except receive IMs
• When the UR2-H is used as an expansion rack:
All S7-400 modules except CPUs, send IMs, the IM 463-2 and the adapter module.

Rack
Design of the UR2-H

The following figure shows the design of the UR2-H rack with 2x9 slots.
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NN NN
NN
NN
NN
(1) Device I
(2) Device II
Figure 2-3 Dimensions of the rack
CAUTION
Property damage may occur.
If you plug a power supply module in a slot that is not intended for power supply modules, the
module may be damaged. Slots 1 to 4 are permitted, whereby the power supply modules must
be plugged in starting from slot 1 without leaving gaps.
Make sure that power supply modules are only plugged into permitted slots. Pay particular
attention to the possibility of confusion between slot 1 in device II and slot 9 in device I.

Rack
Technical specifications of the UR2-H rack
Article number 6ES7400-2JA00-0AA0 6ES7400-2JA10-0AA0

General information
Product type designation UR2-H
Rack
• Communication bus Yes; Separated
• P bus Yes; Separated
Slots
• Number of slots 18; 2 segments with 9 slots each
Standards, approvals, certificates
CE mark Yes
UKCA mark Yes
UL approval Yes
FM approval Yes
KC approval Yes
CCC Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. 0 °C
• max. 60 °C
Ambient temperature during storage/
transportation
• min. 0 °C
• max. 70 °C
Mechanics/material
rack profile material aluminum
Dimensions
Width 482.5 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 27.5 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 4.1 kg 3 kg

Rack
2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)
2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)
Introduction
The CR2 rack is used for setting up segmented central racks. The CR2 has both an I/O bus and a
communication bus. The I/O bus is divided into two local bus segments with 10 and 8 slots
respectively.
Suitable modules for CR2

You can use all S7-400 modules except receive IMs in the CR2 rack.
Design of the CR2
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
5 3
NN NN
NN
NN
NN
(1) Segment 1
(2) Segment 2
(3) I/O bus segment 2
(4) Communication bus
(5) I/O bus segment 1

Rack
2.4 Rack CR2 (6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0)
Technical specifications of the CR2 rack
Article number 6ES7401-2TA01-0AA0

General information
Product type designation CR2
Rack
• Communication bus Yes; Throughout both segments
• P bus Yes; Separated
Slots
• Number of slots 18; 2 segments with 8 or 10 slots
CE mark Yes
UKCA mark Yes
UL approval Yes
FM approval Yes
KC approval Yes
CCC Yes
Ambient conditions
• min. 0 °C
• max. 60 °C
Ambient temperature during storage/transpor‐
tation
• min. 0 °C
• max. 70 °C
Dimensions
Width 482.5 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 27.5 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 4.1 kg

Rack
2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)
2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)
Introduction
The CR3 rack is used for setting up central racks in standard systems (not in high-availability
systems). The CR3 has both an I/O bus and a communication bus.
Suitable modules for CR3

You can use the following modules in the CR3:
• All S7-400 modules except receive IMs
• A CPU 41x-4H may only be used in stand-alone operation.
Design of the CR3

2
NN NN
NN
NN
NN

Rack
2.5 Rack CR3 (6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0)
Technical specifications of the CR3 rack
Article number 6ES7401-1DA01-0AA0

General information
Product type designation CR3
Rack
• Communication bus Yes
• P bus Yes
Slots
• Number of slots 4
CE mark Yes
UKCA mark Yes
UL approval Yes
FM approval Yes
KC approval Yes
CCC Yes
Ambient conditions
• min. 0 °C
• max. 60 °C
Ambient temperature during storage/transpor‐
tation
• min. 0 °C
• max. 70 °C
Dimensions
Width 130 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 27.5 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 750 g

Rack
2.6 The ER2 rack (6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0)
Order number
In the article number 6ES7403-1JAx1-0AA0, the "x" placeholder has the following meaning:
Introduction
The ER2 rack is used for setting up extension racks.
The ER2 rack has only one I/O bus with the following restrictions:
• Interrupts from the ER2 module have no effect because there are no interrupt lines.
• Modules in ER2 are not supplied with 24 V. Modules that require a 24 V supply are not
intended for use in ER2.
• Modules in ER2 are not backed up by the battery in the power supply module or by the voltage
supplied externally to the CPU module or the receive IM (EXT. BATT socket).
There is therefore no advantage in using backup batteries in the ER2 power supply modules.
Battery failures and backup voltage errors are not reported to the CPU. Therefore, battery
monitoring should always be switched off for a power supply module installed in ER2.
Suitable modules for ER2

You can use the following modules in the ER2:
• All power supply modules
• Receive IMs
• All signal modules, provided that the above restrictions are observed.

Rack
Design of the ER2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NN
NN
(1) I/O bus

Rack
Technical specifications of the ER2 rack
Article number 6ES7403-1JA01-0AA0 6ES7403-1JA11-0AA0

General information
Product type designation ER2
Rack
• Communication bus No
• P bus Yes
Slots
• Number of slots 9
CE mark Yes
UKCA mark Yes
UL approval Yes
FM approval Yes
KC approval Yes
CCC Yes
Ambient conditions
• min. 0 °C
• max. 60 °C
Ambient temperature during storage/
transportation
• min. 0 °C
• max. 70 °C
Mechanics/material
rack profile material aluminum
Dimensions
Width 257.5 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 27.5 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 2 200 g 1 250 g

Power supply modules 3
3.1 Common characteristics of the power supply modules
Purpose of the power supply modules

The power supply modules of the S7-400 supply the other modules in the rack with their
operating voltages via the backplane bus. They do not provide load voltages for the signal
modules.
Common properties of all power supply modules

In addition to their module-specific technical specifications, power supply modules share the
following properties:
• Encapsulated design for use in racks of the S7-400 system.
• Heat dissipation through natural convection
• Plug-in connection of the supply voltage with AC - DC coding
• Protection class I (with protective conductor) according to IEC 61140 (VDE 0140, part 1)
• Limiting of inrush current according to NAMUR recommendation NE 21
• Short-circuit-proof outputs
• Monitoring of the two output voltages. If one of these voltages fails, the power supply
module signals an error to the CPU.
• The two output voltages (5 V DC and 24 V DC) have a common ground.
• Primary clocked
• Battery backup is possible. The set parameters and the memory contents (RAM) are buffered
in CPUs and configurable modules over the backplane bus. The backup battery thus enables
a hot restart of the CPU. Both the power supply module and the battery-backed modules
monitor the battery voltage.
• Operation and error display via LEDs on the front plate
Note
A disconnect switch must be provided when installing AC power supply modules.
Switching the line voltage off/on

The power supply modules have inrush current limiting in accordance with NAMUR.

Power supply modules
3.1 Common characteristics of the power supply modules
Power supply module in improper slot

If you plug the power supply module of a rack into a slot not intended for it, it will not go into
operation. In this case, proceed as follows to correctly put the power supply module into
operation:
1. Disconnect the power supply from the supply system (not just standby switch).
2. Remove the power supply module.
3. Install the power supply module in slot 1.
4. Wait at least 1 minute and then switch the supply voltage back on.
CAUTION
Property damage may occur.
If you plug a power supply module in a slot that is not intended for power supply modules,
the module may be damaged. Slots 1 to 4 are permitted, whereby the power supply
modules must be plugged in starting from slot 1 without leaving gaps.
Make sure that power supply modules are only plugged into permitted slots.

3.2 Redundant power supply modules
Order numbers and function
Table 3-1 Power supply modules with redundant capability
Type Order number Input voltage Output voltage See section

PS 407 10A R 6ES7 407-0KR02-0AA0 85 V to 264 V AC or 88 V to 5 V DC/10 A and 3.9 (Page 61)
300 V DC 24 V DC/1 A
PS 405 10A R 6ES7 405-0KR02-0AA0 19.2 V to 72 V DC 5 V DC/10 A and 3.15 (Page 70)
24 V DC/1 A
Redundant operation
With two power supply modules of the type PS 407 10A R or PS 405 10A R, you can set up a
redundant power supply for a rack. This is recommended if you want to increase the availability
of your controller, especially if you must operate it on an unreliable power system.
Setting up a redundant power supply

Redundant operation is possible with the S7 CPUs and racks described in this documentation
package. STEP 7 V4.02 or higher is also required.
To set up a redundant power supply, plug one power supply module each into slots 1 and 3
of the rack. You can then equip the rack with as many modules as can be supplied by a single
power supply, i.e. for redundant operation, all the modules used may draw a total of 10 A.
Properties
The redundant power supply of an S7-400 has the following properties:
• The power supply module has inrush current limiting in accordance with NAMUR.
• Each of the two power supply modules can take over supplying power to the entire rack if the
other one fails. There is no interruption of operation.
• Each of the two power supply modules can be replaced while the system is in operation.
Neither voltage dips nor voltage peaks in the useful voltages occur when modules are
unplugged and plugged.
• Each of the two power supply modules monitors its function and reports its failure.
• Neither power supply module can generate a fault that affects the output voltage of the other
power supply module.
• A redundant battery concept (backup concept) only exists if two backup batteries are used
in each of the two power supply modules. If only one battery is used in each module, only
non-redundant battery backup is possible, since both batteries are under load
simultaneously.

• The failure of a power supply module is signaled by a pull/plug interrupt (default STOP). The
CPU in the 2nd segment of the CR2 does not report the failure of a power supply module.
• If two power supply modules are plugged in but only one is switched on, there is an ON delay
of up to one minute when the line voltage is switched on.
Note
In the Properties dialog box of the CPU, "Startup when expected/actual config. differ" should
be enabled.

3.3 Backup battery (option)
Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 have a battery compartment for one or two backup
batteries. The installation of these backup batteries is optional.
Function of the backup battery(ies)

If backup batteries have been installed, the set parameters and the memory contents (RAM) are
buffered via the backplane bus if the power supply module is switched off or the supply voltage
in CPUs and configurable modules fails, as long as the battery voltage is within tolerance.
Furthermore, the backup battery enables a hot restart of the CPU after power ON.
Both the power supply module and the battery-backed modules monitor the battery voltage.
Inserting the backup battery

Activate battery monitoring after inserting one or two backup batteries. Then make sure that
neither the corresponding BATT1F or BATT2F LED nor the BAF LED are lit when the power supply
is ON. Only then is the backup battery working properly and the buffering guaranteed, as
described above.
Note
Plug the power supply module into the rack and switch it on before inserting a backup battery
for the first time. By doing so, you will extend the service life of the backup battery.
Power supply modules with two backup batteries

Some power supply modules have a battery compartment for two batteries. If you insert two
batteries and set the switch to 2BATT, the power supply module defines one of the two batteries
as the backup battery. This assignment remains in force until the battery is empty. When the
backup battery is completely empty, the system switches to the reserve battery, which in turn is
used as the backup battery for the duration of its life. The "Backup battery" status is also stored
across a power failure.
Battery type
Only batteries approved by Siemens may be used (see Appendix C: Spare parts (Page 365))
The batteries can form a passivation layer. Depassivation takes place after insertion into the

Technical specifications of the backup battery
Article number 6ES7971-0BA00

General information
Product type designation 3.6 V backup battery
Accessories
belongs to product S7-400
Weights
Buffer times
The maximum buffer time results from the capacity of the backup battery(ies) used and the
backup current in the rack. The latter is the sum of the individual currents of the plugged-in
battery-backed modules plus the power supply module's own current draw when the power is
OFF.
Example for calculation of buffer times

The capacity of the batteries is listed in the technical specifications of the respective power
supply, and the typical and maximum backup current of the battery-backed module in the
technical specifications of the module.
The typical backup current of a CPU is an empirically determined value, and the
maximum backup current is a worst-case value determined by summing the corresponding
manufacturer specifications of the memory blocks.
Thus, for a central rack with a PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and a CPU 410-5H
(6ES7410-5HX08-0AB0) as the only battery-backed module, buffer times result from the
following technical specifications:
• Capacity of the backup battery: 2.3 Ah
• Maximum backup current (own draw when power is OFF) of the power supply: 120 µA
• Typical backup current of the CPU 410-5H: 370 µA to 40 °C
Since a load is placed on the backup battery by the periodic depassivation at power ON,
100% of the nominal capacity should not be assumed when calculating the buffer time.
A battery capacity of 63% of the nominal capacity results in the following calculation:
Buffer time = 2.3 Ah * 0.63 / (120 + 370)µA = (1.449 / 490) * 1 000 000 = 2957 h
This results in a maximum buffer time of 123 days.

3.4 Operator controls and indicators
Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 have essentially the same controls and indicators. The
main differences are:
• Power supply modules with a backup battery have an LED (BATTF) that indicates an empty,
defective, or missing backup battery.
• Power supply modules with two redundant backup batteries have two LEDs (BATT1F and
BATT2F) to indicate empty, defective or missing backup battery.
Operator controls and indicators

The figure shows you an example of a power supply module (PS 407 20A) with two (redundant)
backup batteries. The LEDs are at the top left of the module front plate.

Figure 3-1 Operator controls and indicators on the PS 407 20A power supply module

Meaning of the LEDs

The meaning of the LEDs on the power supply modules is described in the tables below. The
following section contains a list of the faults indicated by these LEDs and notes on how to
acknowledge the faults.
LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC
Table 3-2 LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC
LED Color Meaning

INTF Red Lights up in the event of an internal fault
5 VDC green Lights up as long as the 5 V voltage is within the tolerance limits
24 VDC green Lights up as long as the 24 V voltage is within the tolerance limits
LEDs BAF, BATTF

Power supply modules with a backup battery have the following indicators:
Table 3-3 LEDs BAF, BATTF
LED Color Meaning

BAF Red Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low and the
BATT.INDIC switch is at the BATT position
BATTF Yellow Lights up if the battery is empty, if the polarity is reversed, or if the battery
is missing, and the BATT.INDIC switch is at the BATT position
LEDs BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

Power supply modules with two backup batteries have the following indicators:
Table 3-4 LEDs BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F
LED Color Meaning

BAF Red Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low and the
BATT.INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT position
BATT1F Yellow Lights up if battery 1 is empty or if the polarity is reversed or if the battery
is missing, and the BATT.INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT position
BATT2F Yellow Lights up if the battery 2 is empty, if the polarity is reversed, or if the battery
is missing, and the BATT.INDIC switch is at the 2 BATT position
Backup voltage to the backplane bus

The backup voltage is either supplied by the backup battery or fed externally into the CPU or
receiver IM. In its normal state, the level of the backup voltage is between 2.7 V and 3.6 V.
The backup voltage is monitored at the lower limit. Violation of the lower limit is indicated by
the BAF LED and reported to the CPU.

BAF lights up if the backup voltage on the backplane bus is too low. Possible causes of this
include:
• Battery (batteries) empty or battery polarity has been reversed.
• External supply via CPU or receive IM is defective or supply from secondary power supply
module is defective or missing.
• Short-circuit or overload on the battery voltage.
Note
Due to internal capacities, if you remove the battery or switch off the external supply, some
time may elapse before BAF, BATT1F, or BATT2F lights up.
Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules
Table 3-5 Function of the operator controls of the power supply modules
Control Function
FMR button For acknowledging and resetting a fault indicator after correcting the fault
Standby switch Switches the output voltages (5 V VDC24 VDC) to 0 V by intervening in the control
loop (no mains disconnection).
• Output voltages at nominal value
• Output voltage 0 V
Switches Used for setting LEDs and battery monitoring
BATT.INDIC Where one battery can be used (PS 407 4A, PS 405 4A):
• OFF: LEDs and monitor signals inactive
• BATT: BAF/BATTF LEDs and monitor signals active
Where two batteries can be used (PS 407 10A, PS 407 20A, PS 405 10A, PS 405
20A):
• OFF: LEDs and monitor signals inactive
• 1 BATT: Only BAF/BATT1F LEDs (for battery 1) active.
• 2 BATT: BAF/BATT1F/BATT2F LEDs (for batteries 1 and 2) active.
Battery compart‐ For backup battery (batteries)
ment
Power connection 3-pin connector for the power main
(do not pull and plug under power)
Cover
The battery compartment, battery selector switch, voltage selector switch and power
connection are housed under one cover. The cover must remain closed during operation in order
to protect these operator controls and to prevent static electricity from affecting the battery
connections.
Discharge your body before you start taking any measurements on a module. Do so by
touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments.

3.5 Fault/Error messages via LEDs
Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 report module faults and backup battery failures via
LEDs on the front plate.
Overview of the error messages of the power supply modules
Table 3-6 Error messages of the power supply modules
Type of error LED display

Module fault INTF
DC5V
DC24V
Backup battery failure Power supply with 1 backup battery:
BAF
BATTF
Power supply with 2 backup batteries:
BAF
BATT1F
BATT2F
LED displays INTF, DC5V, DC24V

The following table lists the errors indicated by the LED displays INTF, DC5V and DC24V and
provides information on troubleshooting. The status of the LED displays BAF, BATTF, BATT1F and
BATT2F is not relevant here.
Table 3-7 LED displays INTF, DC5V, DC24V
INTF DC5V DC24V Cause of error Remedy

LED LED LED
Off Off Off Standby switch in position Put standby switch in | position
No line voltage Check line voltage
Internal error, power supply module Replace power supply module
defective
Shutdown after overvoltage at 5 V or Disconnect from supply system
impermissible external power supply and reconnect after approx. 3 mi‐
nutes, remove external power sup‐
ply if necessary.
Operation of the power supply mod‐ Install the power supply module in
ule at the wrong slot the correct slot (slot 1).
Short-circuit or overload at 5 V Switch off the power supply mod‐
ule, eliminate the cause of the
short-circuit, after approx. 3 s the
power supply module can be
switched on again with the stand‐
by switch or via the supply system.

INTF DC5V DC24V Cause of error Remedy

LED LED LED
Off On Off Overvoltage at 24 V Check whether external power
supply is present; if not, replace
On Off* Off Short-circuit or overload at 5 V and 24 Check the load on the power sup‐
V and overtemperature ply module. Remove the module if
necessary. Wait 5 minutes before
switching the power supply mod‐
ule back on.
On On Off If standby switch is in Remove all modules; identify faul‐
position, impermissible external ty modules.
power supply at 5 V.
Standby switch in | position, short-cir‐ Check the load on the power sup‐
cuit or overload at 24 V. ply module. Remove the module if
necessary.
Off Flash On Voltage recovery after short-circuit or Press the FMR button: flashing
overload at 5 V, if error occurred dur‐ turns to steady light.
ing operation.
Dynamic overload at 5 V. Check the load on the power sup‐
ply module. Remove module if
necessary.
Off Flash Flash Voltage recovery after short-circuit or Press the FMR button: flashing
overload at 5 V and 24 V, if error oc‐ turns to steady light.
curred during operation.
Off Flash Flash Dynamic overload at 5 V and 24 V. Check the load on the power sup‐
ply module. Remove module if
necessary.
Off = LED is dark; On = LED is lit; Flash = LED is flashing;
* If the power supply module does not restart after a few seconds after elimination of the
overload, disconnect the module from the supply system for 5 minutes and then switch it on
again. If the module still does not start up, you must replace it. This applies to the following
power supply modules:
• 6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0
• 6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0
• 6ES7405-0KR02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0
• 6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0, 6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0
The response of the built-in overtemperature protection is the same.
If either the DC5V or DC24V LED remains dark after switch-on, the system does not power up.
If either the DC5V or DC24V LED of the PS 407 10AR remains dark for longer than approx. 1
to 2 seconds after switch-on, the power supply module does not start up.

In the event of short-circuit or overload, the power supply modules listed below switch off
after 1 s to 3 s. After 3 s at the latest, the module attempts a hot restart. If the error has been
eliminated by then, the module starts up. This applies to the modules:
Modules
PS 405 4A (6ES7405-0DA02-0AA0) PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)
PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0)
PS 405 10A R (6ES7405-0KR02-0AA0) PS 407 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)
PS 405 20A (6ES7405-0RA02-0AA0) PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)
Overload at 24 V
In the event of overload at 24 V, the output current is electronically limited to a value between
100 and 150% of the nominal value. If this causes the voltage to fall below the undervoltage
threshold of 19.2 V (-0/+5% corresponds to 19.2 to 20.16 V), the modules behave as follows:
• In the case of the power supply modules, the 24 V voltage is switched off and then switched
on again every 0.5 to 1 s until an output voltage above the undervoltage threshold is
established.
• In the case of the 6ES740x-0KR00-0AA0 and 6ES740x-0KR01-0AA0 power supply modules,
the voltage adjusts itself according to the load resistance; the module operates according to
its characteristic curve.
After the overload has been eliminated, the voltage returns to the nominal range and the
green 24 V LED flashes. The CPU sets the EXTF LED (external fault) and saves the fault in the
diagnostic buffer. Further reactions such as CPU STOP or message to a control room may be
triggered in OB 81 "Power supply error". If no OB 81 is configured, the CPU continues to run
normally.
Overload at 5 V
In the event of an overload at 5 V, the power supply modules with 10 A or 20 A output current
can maintain an output current of 16 A or 26 A for 300 ms. The power supply modules with 4
A output current can maintain an output current of 6 A for 300 ms. After that the CPU changes
to DEFECTIVE state. If the DC 5 V LED at the power supply flashes and can be reset with the FMR
button, you can execute a hot restart. Afterwards, the CPU remains in STOP and requests a
memory reset.

BAF, BATTF
The following table is valid for power supply modules with a battery when the BATT.INDIC.
switch is in the BATT position. It lists the signaled faults and provides information for
troubleshooting.
Table 3-8 LED displays BAF, BATTF, BATT.INDIC. on BATT
BAF BATF Cause of error Remedy

LED LED
On On Battery is empty or missing. Insert new battery. Press the FMR button.
No external backup voltage available.
Off On Battery is empty or missing. Insert new battery. Press the FMR button.
Battery stored too long. Depassivate battery (see Installation man‐
External backup voltage available. ual).
On Off Battery OK. • Error after plugging in a module: plug‐
No backup voltage available (short-cir‐ ged module defective.
cuit).
• Error after switching on: remove all mod‐
ules and plug them in individually.
Off Off Battery OK. -
External backup voltage available.
Off = LED is dark; ON = LED is lit;
BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries when the BATT.INDIC.
switch is in the 1BATT position. It lists the signaled faults and provides information for
troubleshooting.
Nothing is indicated about the status of a second battery that may be in use.
Table 3-9 LED displays BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT.INDIC. on 1BATT
BAF BATT1F BATT2F Cause of error Remedy

LED LED LED
On On Off Battery 1 is empty or missing. Insert new battery in compartment
No external backup voltage 1. Press the FMR button.
available.
Off On Off Battery 1 is empty or missing. Insert new battery in compartment
External backup voltage availa‐ 1. Press the FMR button.
ble.
Battery 1 stored too long. Depassivate battery (see Installation
External backup voltage availa‐ manual)
ble.
On Off Off Battery 1 OK. • Error after plugging in a module:
No external backup voltage plugged module defective.
available (short-circuit).
• Error after switching on: remove
all modules and plug them in in‐
dividually.


LED LED LED
Off Off Off Battery 1 OK. -
External backup voltage availa‐
ble.
BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F

The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries when the BATT.INDIC.
switch is in the 2BATT position. It lists the signaled faults and provides information for
troubleshooting.
Table 3-10 LED displays BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F; BATT.INDIC. on 2BATT

LED LED LED
On On On Both batteries are empty or Insert new battery in compartments
missing. 1 and 2. Press the FMR button.
No external backup voltage
available.
Off On On Both batteries are empty or Insert new battery in compartments
missing. 1 and 2. Press the FMR button.
ble.
On On Off Battery 1 is empty or missing. Insert new battery in compartment
available (short-circuit or over‐ • Error after plugging in a module:
load). plugged module defective.
dividually.
Off On Off Battery 1 is empty or missing. Insert new battery in compartments
1 and 2. Press the FMR button.
Battery stored too long. Depassivate battery (see Installation
External backup voltage availa‐ manual).
ble.
On Off On Battery 2 is empty or missing. Insert new battery in compartment
available (short-circuit or over‐ • Error after plugging in a module:
load). plugged module defective.
dividually.
Off Off On Battery 2 is empty or missing. Insert new battery in compartments
1 and 2. Press the FMR button.
Battery stored too long. Depassivate battery (see Installation
External backup voltage availa‐ manual).
ble.


LED LED LED
On Off Off Both batteries OK. • Error after plugging in a module:
No external backup voltage plugged module defective.
available (short-circuit).
dividually.
Off Off Off Both batteries OK. -
ble.

3.6 Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7407-0DA02-0AA0)
Function
The power module PS 407 4A is designed for connection to an 85 to 264 V AC network or an 88
to 300 V DC network, and supplies DC 5 V/4 A and DC 24 V/0.5 A at the secondary side.
PS 407 4A operator control and monitoring elements

36$
;

'$$$
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
,17)
%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77)
'&9 9'&9'&
'&9
)05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW

)05
6WDQGE\VZLWFK GRHVQRWFXWRIIPDLQV
8QGHUFRYHU
%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW
%$77,1',& 6ZLWFK%$77,1',&%$77
2))
%$77
2))
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
Figure 3-2 PS 407 4A operator control and monitoring elements
Mains connection
An AC power plug is used with PS 407 4A for connection to an AC network and for connection
to a DC network.
Reverse polarity of L+ and L-

Reverse polarity of L+ and L with a supply voltage of 88 V DC to 300 V DC does not affect the
function of the power supply. The connection should comply with the instructions in the
installation manual.

PS 407 4A technical specifications

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC)
• 120 V DC Yes
• 230 V DC Yes
Rated value (AC)
• 120 V AC Yes
• 230 V AC Yes
Line frequency
• Rated value 50 Hz Yes
• permissible range, lower limit 47 Hz
• permissible range, upper limit 63 Hz
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy time 20 ms
• Mains buffering according to NAMUR recom‐ Yes
mendation
Input current
Rated value at 120 V DC 350 mA
Rated value at 120 V AC 0.42 A
Inrush current, max. 8.5 A; Full width at half maximum 5 ms
Leakage current, max. 3.5 mA
output voltage / header
Type of output voltage DC
Rated value (DC)
• 5 V DC Yes
• 24 V DC Yes
Output current
for backplane bus (5 V DC), max. 4 A; no base load required
for backplane bus (24 V DC), max. 0.5 A; idling-proof
Short-circuit protection Yes
Power
Active power input, typ. 52 W
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 20 W
Battery
Backup battery
• Backup battery (optional) Yes; 1x lithium AA; 3.6 V / 2.2 Ah
• Backup voltage 3.6 V
• Backup current, max. 100 µA; When power off


Slots
• required slots 1
Potential separation
primary/secondary Yes
Isolation
Overvoltage category II
EMC
Compliance with line harmonic distortion limits
• Compliance with line harmonic distortion Yes
acc. to IEC 61000-3-2, IEC 61000-3-3
Degree and class of protection
Equipment protection class I, with protective conductor
FM approval Yes; Ta: 0 °C to 70 °C T4
BIS Yes
Ambient conditions
• min. 0 °C
• max. 60 °C
connection method / header
Design of electrical connection 3x 1.5 mm², solid or stranded wire with end sleeve,
external diameter 3 mm to 9 mm
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 217 mm
Weights

3.7 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)
3.7 Power supply modules PS 407 10A (6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0) and

PS 10A R (6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0)
Function
The power modules PS 407 10A (standard) and PS 407 10A R (for redundant operation,
see Redundant power supply modules (Page 45)) are designed for connection to an 85-264 V AC
network or an 88-300 V DC network, and supply 5 V/10 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary
side.
PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R operator control and monitoring elements
36$

;

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
.$$$
/('V,17)%$)
,17)
%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$77)%$77)9
'&9
'&9'&
'&9
)05

%$77 %$77
8QGHUFRYHU

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
%$772))%$77
2))
%$77
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
Figure 3-3 PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R operator control and monitoring elements
Mains connection
An AC power plug is used with PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R both for connection to an AC
network and connection to a DC network.

function of the power supply. The connection must comply with the instructions in the
installation manual.

PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R technical specifications
Article number 6ES7407-0KA02-0AA0 6ES7407-0KR02-0AA0

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC)
• 120 V DC Yes
• 230 V DC Yes
Rated value (AC)
• 120 V AC Yes
• 230 V AC Yes
Line frequency
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy 20 ms
time
• Mains buffering according to NAMUR Yes
recommendation
Input current
Rated value at 120 V DC 1A
Rated value at 230 V DC 0.5 A
Inrush current, max. 63 A; Full width at half maximum 1 ms
Rated value (DC)
• 5 V DC Yes
• 24 V DC Yes
Output current
for backplane bus (24 V DC), max. 1 A; idling-proof
Power
Power loss
Battery
Backup battery


Slots
Isolation
EMC
Compliance with line harmonic distor‐
tion limits
• Compliance with line harmonic dis‐ Yes
tortion acc. to IEC 61000-3-2, IEC
61000-3-3
Ambient conditions
• min. 0 °C
• max. 60 °C
Design of electrical connection 3x 1.5 mm², solid or stranded wire with end sleeve, exter‐
nal diameter 3 mm to 9 mm
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 217 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 1 200 g

3.8 Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0)
Function
The power module PS 407 20A is designed for connection to an 85-264 V AC network or an
88-300 V DC network, and supply 5 V/20 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary side.

Figure 3-4 PS 407 20A power module operator control and monitoring elements
Mains connection
An AC power plug is used with PS 407 20A both for connection to an AC network and for
connection to a DC network.

function of the power supply. The connection must comply with the instructions in
the installation manual.

Article number 6ES7407-0RA02-0AA0

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC)
• 120 V DC Yes
• 230 V DC Yes
Rated value (AC)
• 120 V AC Yes
• 230 V AC Yes
Line frequency
Mains buffering
mendation
Input current
Inrush current, max. 88 A; Full width at half maximum 1.1 ms
Rated value (DC)
• 5 V DC Yes
• 24 V DC Yes
Output current
Power
Power loss
Battery
Backup battery


Slots
Isolation
EMC
Compliance with line harmonic distortion limits
• Compliance with line harmonic distortion Yes
acc. to IEC 61000-3-2, IEC 61000-3-3
Ambient conditions
• min. 0 °C
• max. 60 °C
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 217 mm
Weights

Function
The power module PS 405 4A is designed for connection to a 19.2 to 72 V DC network, and
supplies 5 V/4 A DC and 24 V/0.5 A DC at the secondary side.

36$
;
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
'$$$
,17)
%$) /('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77)
'&9 9'&9'&
'&9
)05 )05EXWWRQ )DLOXUH0HVVDJH5HVHW

8QGHUFRYHU
%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW
%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2)) %$772))
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ


Supply voltage
Rated value (DC)
• 24 V DC Yes
• 48 V DC Yes
• 60 V DC Yes
Mains buffering
mendation
Input current
Rated value at 48 V DC 1 000 mA
Rated value (DC)
• 5 V DC Yes
• 24 V DC Yes
Output current
for backplane bus (24 V DC), max. 0.5 A; idling-proof
Power
Power loss
Battery
Backup battery
Slots
Isolation


CCC Yes
BIS Yes
Ambient conditions
• min. 0 °C
• max. 60 °C
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 217 mm
Weights

3.10 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) and PS 405 10A R (405-0KR02-0AA0)
3.10 Power supply modules PS 405 10A (6ES7405-0KA02-0AA0) and

PS 405 10A R (405-0KR02-0AA0)
Function
The power modules PS 405 10A (standard) and PS 405 10A R (for redundant operation) are
designed for connection to a 19.2-72 V DC network, and supply 5 V/10 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at
the secondary side.
PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R operator control and monitoring elements
36$

; 0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

.$$$
,17)
/('V,17)%$)
%$77)%$77)9
%$)
%$77)
%$77)
'&9'&
'&9
'&9
)05

8QGHUFRYHU
%$77 %$77

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',& 6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
%$77
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
Figure 3-6 PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R operator control and monitoring elements

PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R technical specifications

Supply voltage
Rated value (DC)
• 24 V DC Yes
• 48 V DC Yes
• 60 V DC Yes
Mains buffering
• Mains/voltage failure stored energy 20 ms
time
• Mains buffering according to NAMUR Yes
recommendation
Input current
Rated value (DC)
• 5 V DC Yes
• 24 V DC Yes
Output current
Power
Power loss
Battery
Backup battery
Slots
Isolation


CCC Yes
BIS Yes
Ambient conditions
• min. 0 °C
• max. 60 °C
Design of electrical connection 3x 1.5 mm², solid or stranded wire with end sleeve, exter‐
nal diameter 3 mm to 9 mm
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 217 mm
Weights

Function
The power module PS 405 20A is designed for connection to a 19.2-72 V DC network, and
supplies 5 V/20 A DC and 24 V/1 A DC at the secondary side.

36$
;

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
5$$$
,17)
%$)
/('V,17)%$)
%$77)
%$77) %$77)%$77)9
'&9
'&9'&
'&9
)05

%$77 %$77
8QGHUFRYHU

%DWWHU\FRPSDUWPHQW

%$77,1',&
%$77
6ZLWFK%$77,1',&
2))
%$77 %$772))%$77
SLQSRZHUFRQQHFWRU
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ


Supply voltage
Rated value (DC)
• 24 V DC Yes
• 48 V DC Yes
• 60 V DC Yes
Mains buffering
mendation
Input current
Inrush current, max. 56 A; Full width at half maximum 1.5 ms
Rated value (DC)
• 5 V DC Yes
• 24 V DC Yes
Output current
Power
Power loss
Battery
Backup battery
Slots
Isolation


CCC Yes
BIS Yes
Ambient conditions
• min. 0 °C
• max. 60 °C
Dimensions
Width 50 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 217 mm
Weights


Digital modules 4
4.1 Module overview
Properties of the digital modules

The following tables summarize the main properties of the digital modules. The purpose of this
overview is to help you select the right module for your requirements.
Table 4-1 Digital input modules: Properties at a glance
Properties SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421;

DI 32xDC DI 16xDC DI 16xUC DI 16xUC DI 16xUC DI 32xUC
24 V 24 V 24/60 V 120/230 V 120/230 V 120 V
(-1BL0x-) (-7BH0x-) (-7DH00-) (-1FH00-) (-1FH20-) (-1EL00-)
Number of in‐ 32 DI, isolated in 16 DI, isolated in 16 DI, isolated in 16 DI, isolated 16 DI, isolated in 32 DI, isolated
puts groups groups groups in groups groups in groups
of 32 of 8 of 1 of 4 of 4 of 8
Nominal in‐ 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V to 60 V UC 120 V AC/ 120 V UC/ 120 V AC/DC
put voltage 230 V DC 230 V UC
Suitable Switches; 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
for ...
Configurable No Yes Yes No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic in‐ No Yes Yes No No No
terrupt
Hardware in‐ No Yes Yes No No No
terrupt at
edge transi‐
tion
Adjustable No Yes Yes No No No
input delays
Substitute - Yes - - - -
value output
Special fea‐ High packing den‐ Fast and inter‐ Interruptible For high, varia‐ For high, varia‐ High packing
tures sity ruptible for low, varia‐ ble voltages ble voltages density
ble voltages Input character‐
istic curve ac‐
cording to IEC
61131-2

Digital modules
4.1 Module overview
Table 4-2 Digital output modules: Properties at a glance
Properties SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422;

DO 16xDC DO 32xDC DO 32xDC DO 8xAC DO 16xAC
24 V/2 A 24 V/0.5 A 24 V/0.5 A 120/230 V/ 5 A 120/230 V/ 2 A
(-1FF00) (-1FH00)
(-1BH1x) (-1BL00) (-7BL00)
Number of out‐ 16 DO, isolated in 32 DO, isolated in 32 DO, isolated in 8 DO, isolated in 16 DO, isolated
puts groups of 8 groups groups groups of 1 in groups
of 32 of 8 of 4
Output current 2A 0.5 A 0.5 A 5A 2A
Nominal load 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 120/ 230 V AC 120/ 230 V AC
voltage
Configurable No No Yes No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic in‐ No No Yes No No
terrupt
Substitute val‐ No No Yes No No
ue output
Special features For high currents High Especially fast and For high currents -
packing density interruptible with channel-granu‐
lar isolation
Table 4-3 Relay output module: Properties at a glance
Properties SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

(-1HH00)
Number of outputs 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8
Load voltage 125 V DC
230 V AC
Special features -

Digital modules
4.3 Assigning parameters to digital modules
4.2 Steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module
Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to
commission digital modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier
or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install, commission etc. other
modules in between times.
Overview of steps in selecting and commissioning the digital module
Step Procedure
1 Select the module. Section 4.1 (Page 77) and special sections for
modules beginning with Section 4.7 (Page 91)
2 Mount the module in the rack. "Installing" section in the Automation System
S7-400, Hardware and Installation manual
3 Assigning module parameters Section 4.3 (Page 79) and special sections for
modules beginning with Section 4.7
4 Commissioning the configuration "Commissioning" section in the Automation Sys‐
tem S7-400, Hardware and Installation manual
5 Analyzing the configuration if commission‐ Section 4.4 (Page 82)
ing is not successful
4.3.1 Parameters
Introduction
Digital modules may have different features. You can configure the features of some modules.
Tools for parameter assignment

You assign parameters to digital modules in STEP 7.
After you have defined all parameters, download these from your programming device to the
CPU. On a transition from STOP ＞ RUN mode, the CPU then transfers the parameters to the
individual digital modules.
Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.

Digital modules
Static parameters are passed to digital modules after a STOP ＞ RUN transition of the CPU, as
described above.
You may also edit dynamic parameters in the active user program of an S7 PLC using SFCs.
However, the parameters set in STEP 7 will be applied again after a RUN > STOP, STOP > RUN
transition of the CPU. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules in
the user program in the Appendix.
Configuration in RUN (CiR)

CiR (Configuration in RUN) is a method you can use to modify your system or edit the parameters
of individual modules. These changes are made while your system is in operation, that is, your
CPU will stay in RUN over a maximum of 2.5 seconds while these changes are applied.
For detailed information on this topic, refer to the "Configuration in RUN by means of CiR"
manual. This manual is found, for example, as a file in PDF format on the STEP 7 CD supplied.

Digital modules
4.3.2 Parameters of digital input modules
Overview
The configurable digital input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed
in the table below, depending on functionality. For information on subsets "supported" by
specific digital modules, refer to the chapter dealing with the relevant module. Do not forget that
some digital modules have different input delays after parameter assignment.
The defaults apply if you have not set any parameters in STEP 7.
Table 4-4 Parameters of digital input modules
Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter Scope

type
Enable
• Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
• Hardware interrupt 1 Yes/no No
• Destination CPU for inter‐ 1 to 4 - Static Module
rupt
Diagnostics
• Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel
• No load voltage L+/sensor Yes/no No
supply
Hardware interrupt trigger
• Positive edge Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
• Negative edge Yes/no No
Input delay 0.1 ms (DC) 3 (DC) Static Channel
0.5 ms (DC)
3 ms (DC)
20 ms (DC/AC)
Reaction to error Set substitution SV Dynamic Module
value (SSV)
Keep last value
(KLV)
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel 3
1
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are
not available in ER-1/ER-2.
2
Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings and
without support from HWCONFIG.
3
Channels not selected for substitute value "1" are assigned substitute value "0".

Digital modules
4.4 Diagnostics for digital modules
4.3.3 Parameters of digital output modules
Overview
The configurable digital output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values
listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. For information on subsets "supported"
by specific digital modules, refer to the section dealing with the relevant module beginning with
section 4.7.
Table 4-5 Parameters of digital output modules
Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter type Scope

Enable
• Destination CPU for in‐ 1 to 4 - Static Module
terrupt
Reaction to CPU STOP Substitute a val‐ SV Dynamic Module
ue (SV)
Keep last value
(KLV)
Diagnostics
• Load voltage L+ miss‐ Yes/no No
ing
• Short-circuit to M Yes/no No
• Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No
• Fuse blown Yes/no No
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel 3
1
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are
not available in ER-1/ER-2.
2
Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings and
without support from HWCONFIG.
3
Channels not selected for substitute value "1" are assigned substitute value "0".
4.4.1 General information about diagnostic messages
Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

Using the diagnostics function, we make a distinction between programmable and non-
programmable diagnostic messages.

Digital modules
You only obtain programmable diagnostic messages if you have enabled the diagnostics
using the relevant parameters. You perform parameter assignment in the "Diagnostics" tab in
STEP 7, see section 6.7.
Digital modules always return non-programmable diagnostic messages, irrespective of
diagnostics being enabled.
Reactions to diagnostic messages in STEP 7

Actions initiated by diagnostic messages:
• The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnostics of the digital module, forwarded to the
CPU and can be read out by the user program.
• The fault LED on the digital module lights up.
• If you have set "Enable diagnostic interrupt" in STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and
OB 82 is called, see section 5.5.
Reading diagnostic messages

You can read detailed diagnostic messages using SFCs in the user program (refer to the appendix
"Diagnostic data of signal modules").
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7 in the module diagnostics (refer to the online
help for STEP 7).
Diagnostics using the INTF and EXTF LEDs

Some digital modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF (internal fault) and
EXTF (external fault). The LEDs go out when all the internal and external faults have been
eliminated.
Refer to the specifications of the modules beginning with section 5.7 to find out which digital
modules have these fault LEDs.
See also
General information about parameter assignment (Page 178)
Interrupts of the digital modules (Page 87)

Digital modules
4.4.2 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules
Overview
The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the digital modules with
diagnostics capability.
You can find out which diagnostic message each module is capable of in the Appendix
entitled "Diagnostic data of the signal modules".
Table 4-6 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules
Diagnostic message LED Scope of diagnostics Programmable

Module error INTF/EXTF Module No
Internal error INTF Module No
External error EXTF Module No
Channel error INTF/EXTF Module No
External auxiliary voltage missing EXTF Module No
Front connector missing EXTF Module No
No module parameters INTF Module No
Incorrect parameters INTF Module No
Channel information available INTF/EXTF Module No
STOP mode - Module No
Internal voltage failure INTF Module No
EPROM error INTF Module No
Hardware interrupt lost INTF Module No
Parameter assignment error INTF Channel No
Short-circuit to M EXTF Channel Yes
Short-circuit to L+ EXTF Channel Yes
Wire break EXTF Channel Yes
Fuse blown INTF Channel Yes
Sensor supply missing EXTF Channel/channel Yes
group
Load voltage L+ missing EXTF Channel/channel Yes
group
Note
Prerequisite for detecting errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is an
appropriate configuration of the digital module in STEP 7.

Digital modules
4.4.3 Causes of errors and remedies for digital modules
Overview
Table 4-7 Diagnostic messages of the digital modules, causes of errors and remedies
Diagnostic message Possible cause of error Remedy

Module error Any, the module has detected an er‐ -
ror.
Internal error Module has detected an error within -
the automation system.
External error Module has detected an error out‐ -
side of the automation system.
Channel error Indicates that only certain channels -
are faulty.
External auxiliary volt‐ Voltage required to operate the Supply missing voltage
age missing module is missing (load voltage,
sensor supply).
Front connector miss‐ Jumper between connections 1 and Install jumper
ing 2 in the front connector is missing.
No module Module requires information wheth‐ Message queued after power-on until pa‐
parameters er it should operate with default sys‐ rameter transmission by the CPU has
tem parameters or with your param‐ been completed; configure the module,
eters. as required.
Incorrect parameters One parameter, or the combination Reassign parameters to the module
of parameters, is not plausible.
Channel information Channel error; module can provide -
available additional channel information.
STOP mode No parameters have been assigned If after rebooting the CPU all the input
to the module and the first module values are in the intermediate memory,
cycle has not been completed. this message is reset.
Internal voltage failure Module is defective Replace the module
EPROM error Module is defective Replace the module
Hardware interrupt The module cannot send an inter‐ Change the interrupt handling in the CPU
lost rupt, since the previous interrupt (change priority for interrupt OB; shorten
was not acknowledged; possible interrupt program).
configuration error.
Parameter assignment Incorrect parameters transferred to Reassign parameters to the module
error the module (for example, impossi‐
ble input delay); the corresponding
channel is deactivated.
Short-circuit to M Overload at output Eliminate overload
Short-circuit of output to M Check the wiring of the outputs.
Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit of output to L+ Check the wiring of the outputs.

Digital modules

Wire break Lines interrupted Connect the cable
No external sensor supply Wire sensors with10 to 18 kΩ.
Channel not connected (open) Disable the "Diagnostics – Wire break" pa‐
rameter for the channel in STEP 7.
Wire the channel
Fuse blown One or more fuses on the module Remove the overload and replace the
has blown and caused this fault. fuse.
Sensor supply missing Overload at sensor supply Eliminate overload
Short-circuit of sensor supply to M Eliminate the short-circuit.
Load voltage L+ miss‐ Power supply L+ to module missing Feed in supply voltage L+.
ing Fuse in module is defective Replace the module

Digital modules
4.5 Interrupts of the digital modules
Introduction
This section describes the interrupt behavior of the digital modules. There are two types of
interrupt:
• Diagnostic interrupt
• Hardware interrupt
Note that not all digital modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable of a
subset of the interrupts described here. For information on the digital modules that support
interrupts, refer to their specifications.
For detailed information on the OBs and SFCs mentioned below, refer to the STEP 7 Online
Help.
Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset - in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter
assignment. Interrupts are enabled in STEP 7.
Special feature: The module is inserted in ER-1/ER-2
Note
If you use the digital module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set the parameters for enabling all the
interrupts to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2.
Diagnostic interrupt
When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, incoming error events (initial occurrence) and outgoing
error events (error is cleared) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts user program execution, and executes diagnostic interrupt OB82.
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed
diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is
exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
Hardware interrupt
A digital input module can trigger a hardware interrupt for each channel at a rising or falling
edge, or both, of a signal status change.
You perform parameter assignment for each channel separately. The parameters can be
changed at any time (in RUN mode in the user program.)

Digital modules
Pending hardware interrupts trigger hardware interrupt processing in the CPU (OB 40 to OB
47). The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or the priority classes with low
priority.
In the user program of the hardware interrupt OB (OB 40 to OB 47) you can specify how the
programmable controller is to respond to an edge change. The module acknowledges the
hardware interrupt when the program exits the hardware interrupt OB.
For each channel the digital input module can buffer an interrupt that has not been
triggered. If no run levels of a higher priority class are pending processing, the CPU processes
the buffered interrupts (of all modules) in the order of their occurrence.
Hardware interrupt lost

A "Hardware interrupt lost" diagnostics interrupt is generated, if a successive interrupt occurs at
the same channel before the CPU has processed the previously buffered interrupt.
The CPU does not register any further interrupts at this channel unless it has completed
processing of the stacked interrupts of the same channel.
Interrupt-triggering channels
The interrupt-triggering channels are stored in the local data of the hardware interrupt OBs (in
the start information of the corresponding OB). The start information is two words long (bits 0
to 31). The bit number is the channel number. Bits 16 to 31 are not assigned.
See also

Digital modules
4.6 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs
IEC 61131, type 1 and type 2

The IEC 61131 standard requires the following for the input current:
• In the case of type 2, an input current of ≥ 2 mA already at + 5 V
• In the case of type 1, an input current of ≥ 0.5 mA already at + 5 V
EN 60947-5-2, 2-wire BEROs

The standard for BEROs (EN 60947-5-2) specifies that there can be a current of ≤ 1.5 mA for
BEROs in the "0" signal state.
The input current of the module in the "0" signal state is decisive for the operation of 2-wire
BEROs. This must be in accordance with BERO requirements.

Digital modules
Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

As long as the current flowing into the module remains ≤ 1.5 mA, the module recognizes this as
a "0" signal.
Typ. switching threshold(9.5 V)
I E (mA) Resistance characteristic curve
7
I min to IEC 61131; type 2
6
BERO
standard
I < 1,5 mA
2 I min to IEC 61131; type 1

1,5
0,5
0 5 11 13 15 24 30 L+ (V)
- 30 V
“0” “1”
L+
1
2-wire BERO
0 --> “0” Signal
I < 1,5 mA
PLC input resistance
Figure 4-1 Input characteristic curve for digital inputs

Digital modules
4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)
4.7 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V

(6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0)
Properties
Key properties of the SM 421; DI 32 x 24 V DC:
• 32 inputs, isolated in a group of 32
• Rated input voltage 24 V DC
• Suitable for switches and 2-/3-/4-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131; type 1)
The status LEDs indicate the process status.

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 32 x 24 V DC
Process Module
1
2
L+ 3
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3
8 4
9 5
10 6
11 7 M
12
13
14
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5
Data register and bus control

21 6
22 7
23
24
25
26
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36
37
38
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
M 48 M
Figure 4-2 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 32 x 24 V DC

Digital modules
Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 32 x DC 24 V
Article number 6ES7421-1BL01-0AA0

Input current
from backplane bus 5 V DC, max. 20 mA
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 6W
Digital inputs
Number of digital inputs 32
Input characteristic according to IEC 61131 Type 1
Number of simultaneously controllable inputs
• Number of simultaneously controllable in‐ 32
puts
Input voltage
• Type of input voltage DC
• Rated value (DC) 24 V
• for signal "0" -30 V DC to +5 V DC
• for signal "1" 13 V DC to 30 V DC
Input current
• for signal "0", max. (permissible quiescent 1.3 mA
current)
• for signal "1", typ. 7 mA
Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
for standard inputs
– at "0" to "1", min. 1.2 ms
– at "0" to "1", max. 4.8 ms
– at "1" to "0", min. 1.2 ms
– at "1" to "0", max. 4.8 ms
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m
• unshielded, max. 600 m
Encoder
Connectable encoders
• 2-wire sensor Yes
– permissible quiescent current (2-wire 1.5 mA
sensor), max.
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Diagnostics function No
Substitute values connectable No
Diagnostics indication LED
• Status indicator digital input (green) Yes
Potential separation digital inputs
• between the channels No

Digital modules
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V (6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)

• between the channels, in groups of 32
• between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Permissible potential difference
between different circuits 60 V DC/30 V AC
Isolation
Isolation tested with 500 V AC/707 V DC, type test
tested with
• Channels against backplane bus and load 500 V AC/707 V DC, type test
voltage L+
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights
4.8 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

(6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0)
4.8.1 Features
Overview
SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC has the following properties:
• 16 inputs, isolated in 2 groups of 8
• Rapid signal processing Input filter from 50 µs
• Rated input voltage 24 V DC
• Suitable for switches and 2-/3-/4-wire proximity switches (BEROs, IEC 61131-2; type 2)
• 2 short-circuit proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each
• External redundant supply for sensor supply possible
• Status display "Sensor voltage (Vs) O.K."
• Group fault display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
• Configurable diagnostics
• Configurable diagnostic interrupt
• Configurable hardware interrupts

Digital modules
• Configurable input delays

• Configurable substitute values in the input range
Note
The module spare parts are compatible with SM 421 module; DI 16 x 24 V DC;
(6ES7 421-7BH00-0AB0)
To use the new function "Input delay 50 µs", you require STEP7 from V 5.2.

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC
INTF Front connector monitoring

1 Monitoring of external auxiliary voltage 1L+
2 EXTF
1L+ Monitoring of internal voltage
3 1L+ 1L+
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2
9
10 3
11
24 V 12
13 1Vs 1M
14 1L+
Backplane bus connection

Short-circuit
15 4
protection
16
17 5 Monitoring of encoder supply 1Vs
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
1M 1M
23 1M
24 1M Monitoring of external auxiliary voltage 2L+
2L+ 25 2L+ Monitoring of internal voltage
26 2L+ 2L+
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
24 V 35 2M
36
37 2Vs Short-circuit 2L+
protection
38
39 4
Monitoring of encoder supply 2Vs
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46
2M 47 2M
48 2M 2M
M
L+
24 V
Figure 4-3 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC

Digital modules
Connection diagram for redundant sensor supply

The image below shows how sensors can be supplied with a redundant voltage source over Vs
(e.g. through another module).
L+
1 L+
Short-circuit-
proof driver Vs
2 L+
Digital input M
module ±
to the sensors
Figure 4-4 Connection diagram for redundant sensor supply for SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC

Digital modules
Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 16 x 24 V DC
Article number 6ES7421-7BH01-0AB0

Supply voltage
Load voltage L+
• permissible range, lower limit (DC) 20.4 V
• permissible range, upper limit (DC) 28.8 V
• Reverse polarity protection Yes
Input current
from supply voltage L+, max. 120 mA
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 2
Type of output voltage L+ (-2.5 V)
Short-circuit protection Yes; Electronic
additional (redundant) feed Yes; possible
Output current
• Rated value 120 mA
• permissible range, lower limit 0 mA
• permissible range, upper limit 150 mA
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 5W
Digital inputs
puts
Input voltage
• Type of input voltage DC
• for signal "0" -30 V DC to +5 V DC
• for signal "1" 11 V DC to 30 V DC
Input current
• for signal "0", min. 6 mA; < 6 mA
• for signal "1", typ. 6 mA; 6 to 8 mA
Internal preparation time
• for enable process interrupt, max. 60 µs
• Input frequency (with a time delay of 0.1 ms), 2 kHz
max.
for standard inputs
– parameterizable Yes

Digital modules

– at "0" to "1", min. 3 µs; 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.5 / 3 ms
Encoder connection
• Fixed current limitation for wire-break moni‐ 10 kΩ
toring, min.
• Fixed current limitation for wire-break moni‐ 18 kΩ
toring, max.
Cable length
• shielded, max. 1 000 m; 1 000 m: 3 ms, 70 m: 0.5 ms, 30 m: 0.1
ms, 30 m: 0.05 ms
• unshielded, max. 600 m; 600 m: 3 ms; 50 m: 0,5 ms; 20 m: 0,1 ms;
20 m: 0,05 ms
Encoder
– permissible quiescent current (2-wire 3 mA
sensor), max.
Diagnostics function Yes; Parameterizable
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
• Diagnostic alarm Yes; Parameterizable
• Hardware interrupt Yes; Parameterizable
Diagnoses
• Diagnostic information readable Yes
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes
• Wire-break Yes; I < 1 mA
• Rated load voltage PWR (green) Yes; Per group
• internal fault INTF (red) Yes
• external fault EXTF (red) Yes
• Channel fault indicator F (red) No
• between the channels Yes
Isolation
Isolation tested with 500 V DC
tested with

Digital modules

• Channels against backplane bus and load 500 V DC
voltage L+
• Between channels 500 V DC
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Digital modules
4.8.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Parameter assignment
You will find a description of the general configuration of digital modules in section 5.3.
Parameters of SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
The table below shows an overview of configurable parameters and their default settings for
SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V.
Table 4-8 Parameters of SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

type
Enable
• Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static Module
Diagnostics
• No load voltage L+/sensor supply Yes/no No Channel group
• Positive edge Yes/no - Dynamic Channel
• Negative edge Yes/no
Input delay 0.05 ms 3 ms Static Channel group
0.1 ms
0.5 ms
3 ms
Reaction to error Set substitution val‐ SV Dynamic Module
ue (SSV)
Hold last value (HLV)
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
1
If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/
ER-2.
2
Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.
Allocating the sensor supplies to channel groups

The two sensor supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups: Inputs 0 to 7 and
inputs 8 to 15. You also configure diagnostics for the sensor supply at those two channel groups.
Ensuring a wire break check is carried out

To ensure that a wire break check is carried out, you require an external sensor circuit using a
resistor of 10 to 18 kΩ. The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should be
arranged as closely as possible to the sensor.

Digital modules
This additional resistor is not required in the following cases:

• If 2-wire BEROs are used
• If you do no configure the "Wire break" diagnostics
Setting the input delay for channel groups

You can only set the input delay for each group of channels. In other words, the setting for
channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15.
Note
The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels (1 to 7 and 9 to 15) must be equal
to the value 0 or 8, otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorrectly configured.
Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after
acknowledgement.
Optimum signal propagation delays

You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings:
• Both channel groups are configured with an input delay of 50 µs
• All the diagnoses (load voltage error, wire break) are deactivated
• Diagnostic interrupt is not enabled
See also
Parameters (Page 79)

Digital modules
4.8.3 Behavior of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Effect of operating mode and supply voltage on the input values

The input values of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC depend on the operating mode of the CPU and on
the supply voltage of the module.
Table 4-9 Relationships of the analog input values on the CPU's operating state and on the L+
supply voltage
CPU operating state Power supply L+ at digital module Input value of digital module
POWER ON RUN L+ present Process value
L+ missing 0 signal*
STOP L+ present Process value
L+ missing 0 signal*
POWER OFF - L+ present -
L+ missing -
* Depends on the parameter assignment
Reaction to failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC is always indicated by the EXTF LED
on the module. This information is also available on the module (entry in diagnostic data.)
Diagnostics interrupt triggering is based on parameter settings.
Short-circuit at the sensor supply Vs

The relevant Vs LED goes dark if a short-circuit is detected at the sensor supply Vs, irrespective
of parameter settings.
Effect of errors and parameter assignment on the input values

The input values of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 DC are affected by certain errors and the parameter
assignment of the module. The following table lists the effects on the input values.
You can find more diagnostic messages in the Appendix "Diagnostic Data of the Signal
Modules".
Table 4-10 Relationships between the input values of errors and the configuration
Diagnostic message "Diagnostics" "Reaction to Er‐ Input value of digital module

parameter ror" parameter
No module parame‐ Cannot be disa‐ Not relevant 0 signal (all channels)
ters bled
Front connector miss‐ Substitute a value Configured substitute value
ing (SV)
KLV Last read, valid value

Digital modules
Diagnostic message "Diagnostics" "Reaction to Er‐ Input value of digital module

parameter ror" parameter
Incorrect parameters Cannot be disa‐ Not relevant 0 signal (module/all incorrectly config‐
(module/channel) bled ured channels)
Internal voltage failure Cannot be disa‐ Substitute a value Configured substitute value
bled (SV)
Hardware interrupt Cannot be disa‐ Not relevant Current process value
lost bled
Wire break (for each Disabled - 0 signal
channel) Activated Substitute a value Configured substitute value
(SV)
Sensor supply missing Disabled - 0 signal
(also activated via "No Activated Substitute a value Configured substitute value
Load Voltage L+") (SV)
No load voltage L+ (for Disabled - 0 signal, if the contact is connected via
each channel group) the sensor supply; process value for the
external sensor supply
Activated Substitute a value Configured substitute value
(SV)
Behavior when the input delay equals 0.1 ms or 0.05 ms and an error occurs
If you have set the following parameters:
• Input delay: 0.1 ms or 0.05 ms
• Reaction to error: "Keep Last Value" (KLV) or "Substitute Value" (SV)
• Set substitution value "1"
In the event of a fault on a channel that has a 1 signal, the following could occur:
• A 0 signal may be briefly output
• If configured, a hardware interrupt may be generated.
This occurs before the last valid value or substitute value "1" is output.

Digital modules
4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V (6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)
4.9 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

(6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0)
4.9.1 Features
Overview
SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V has the following features:
• 16 inputs, individually isolated
• Rated input voltage UC 24 V to UC 60 V
• Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
• Suitable as P-reading and M-reading input
• Configurable hardware interrupts
• Configurable input delays

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Process Module
1 INTF
Front connector jumper
2 EXTF
3
L 4 Input
0 Adaptation
N 5 Diagnostics
1N
L 6 Input
1 Adaptation Diagnostics
N 7
L 2N Input
8 2
N Adaptation Diagnostics
9 3N
L 10 Input
3 Adaptation Diagnostics
N 11 4N
12
13
14
L 15 Input
4 Adaptation
N 16 Diagnostics
L 5N
17 Input
5 Adaptation
N 18 Diagnostics
L 6N Input
19 6
20 7N
L 21 Input
7

22 8N
23
24
25
26
L 27 Input
0 Adaptation
N Diagnostics
28 9N
L 29 Input
1 Adaptation
N 30 Diagnostics
L 10 N Input
31 2
32 11 N
L 33 Input
3 Adaptation
N 34 Diagnostics
12 N
35
36
37
38
L 39 Input
4 Adaptation
N 40 Diagnostics
L 13 N
41 Input
5 Adaptation
N 42 Diagnostics
L 14 N Input
43 6
44 15 N
L 45 Input
7
46 16 N
47
48
Figure 4-5 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Digital modules
Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Article number 6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0

Input current
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 8 W; 3.5 W (24 V DC); 6.5 W (48 V DC); 8.0 W (60 V
DC)
Digital inputs
puts
Input voltage
• Type of input voltage AC/DC
• Rated value (UC) 24 V; 24 V UC to 60 V UC (47 ... 63 Hz)
• for signal "0" -6 to +6 V DC/ 0 to 5 V AC
• for signal "1" 15 to 72 V DC; -15 to -72 V DC; 15 to 60 V AC
Input current
Internal preparation time
• for enable process interrupt, max. 450 µs
• for enable process and diagnostics interrupt , 2 ms
max.
for standard inputs
– Rated value 0.5 ms; 0.5 / 3 / 10 / 20 ms
Encoder connection
• Fixed current limitation for wire-break moni‐ 18 kΩ; 18 kohms: Rated voltage 24 V (15 to 35 V);
toring, min. 39 kohms: Rated voltage 48 V (30 to 60 V)
• Fixed current limitation for wire-break moni‐ 56 kΩ; Rated voltage 60 V (50 to 72 V)
toring, max.
Cable length
• unshielded, max. 600 m; 600 m: 3, 10, 20 ms; 100 m: 0,5 ms
Encoder
– permissible quiescent current (2-wire 0.5 mA; 0.5 to 2 mA
sensor), max.
Alarms

Digital modules
Article number 6ES7421-7DH00-0AB0

Diagnoses
• Diagnostic information readable Yes; possible
• Wire-break Yes; I> 0.7 mA
• Channel fault indicator F (red) No
Isolation
Isolation tested with 1 500 V AC
tested with
• Channels against backplane bus and load 1 500 V AC
voltage L+
• Between channels 1 500 V AC
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Digital modules
4.9.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
You will find a description of the general configuration of digital modules in section 5.3.
Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

The following table contains an overview of the parameters you can set and their default
settings for the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V.
Table 4-11 Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Parameters Value range Default2 Parameter type Scope

Enable
• Hardware interrupt1 Yes/no No
Diagnostics
• Positive edge yes/no - Dynamic Channel
yes/no
• Negative edge
Input delay3 0.5 ms (DC) 3 ms (DC) Static Channel group
3 ms (DC)
20 ms (DC/AC)
1
ER-2.
2
3
If you assign 0.5 ms , then you should not configure diagnostics because the internal processing time for diagnostic functions
can be > 0.5 ms.
Ensuring a wire break check is carried out

To ensure that a wire break check is carried out, you require an external sensor circuit using a
resistor of 18 to 56 kΩ. The resistor should be connected parallel to the contact and should be
arranged as closely as possible to the sensor.
This additional resistor is not required in the following cases:
• If 2-wire BEROs are used
• If you do no configure the "Wire Break" diagnostics

Digital modules
Setting the input delay for channel groups

You can only set the input delay for each group of channels. In other words, the setting for
channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15.
Note
The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels (1 to 7 and 9 to 15) must be equal
to the value 0 or 8, otherwise those channels will be reported as being incorrectly configured.
Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after
acknowledgement.
Optimum signal propagation delays

You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings:
• Both channel groups are configured with an input delay of 0.5 ms
• The diagnostics parameter is disabled
• The diagnostic interrupt parameter is disabled
Circuit as for active high or active low input
DI_x
Channel x of the
SM 421 DI 16xUC 24/60 V
DI_xN
U_s
Active high Source input

L+ L+
"1" "0"
U_s U_s
"0"
0V 0V
U_s
"1"
"1"
- L+ - L+
Input threshold
Figure 4-6 Circuit as for active high or active low input

Digital modules
See also

Digital modules
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V (6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)
4.10 Digital input module SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

(6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0)
Properties
SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V has the following features:
• 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 4
• Rated input voltage UC 120/230 V
• Input characteristic in accordance with IEC 61131-2; type 2
• Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches (BEROs)

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V
Process 1 Module
2
3
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2

9
10 3
11
12
13 1N
14
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
23
24 2N
25
26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
36 3N
37
38
39 4
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46
47
48 4N
Figure 4-7 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V

Digital modules
Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 16 x UC 120/230 V
Article number 6ES7421-1FH20-0AA0

Input current
Power loss
Digital inputs
puts
Input voltage
• Rated value (UC) 230 V; 120/230 V UC (47 ... 63 Hz)
• for signal "0" 0 to 40 V AC/ -40 to +40 V DC
• for signal "1" 74 to 264 V AC; 80 to 264 V DC, -80 to -264 V
Input current
• for signal "0", min. 0 mA; AC: 0 mA; DC: 0 mA
• for signal "0", max. (permissible quiescent 6 mA; AC: 6 mA; DC: 2 mA
current)
• for signal "1", typ. 10 mA; at 120 V: 10 mA AC, 1.8 mA DC; at 230 V: 14
mA AC, 2 mA DC
for standard inputs
– at "0" to "1", max. 20 ms; AC: 20 ms; DC: 15 ms
– at "1" to "0", max. 30 ms; AC: 30 ms; DC: 25 ms
Cable length
Encoder
– permissible quiescent current (2-wire 5 mA; AC: 5 mA
sensor), max.

Digital modules

between M internally and the inputs 250 V AC
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Digital modules
4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V (6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)
4.11 Digital input module SM 421; DI 32xUC 120 V

(6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0)
Properties
SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V has the following features:
• 32 inputs, isolated
• Rated input voltage UC 120 V
• Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V
Process 1 Module
2
3
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3
8 4
9 5
10 6
11 7
12
13 1N

14
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5
21 6
22 7
23
24 2N
25
26
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36 3N
37
38
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
48 4N
Figure 4-8 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V

Digital modules
Technical specifications for SM 421; DI 32 x UC 120 V
Article number 6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0

Input current
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 6.5 W
Digital inputs
puts
Input voltage
• Rated value (UC) 120 V; 47 ... 63 Hz
• for signal "0" 0 to 20 V UC
• for signal "1" 79 to 132 V AC; 80 to 132 V DC
Input current
• for signal "0", min. 0 mA
• for signal "0", max. (permissible quiescent 1 mA
current)
for standard inputs
– at "0" to "1", min. 5 ms
– at "0" to "1", max. 25 ms; 10 / 20 ms
– at "1" to "0", min. 5 ms
– at "1" to "0", max. 25 µs
Cable length
Encoder
– permissible quiescent current (2-wire 1 mA
sensor), max.

Digital modules
Article number 6ES7421-1EL00-0AA0

between M internally and the inputs 120 V AC
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Digital modules
4.12 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A; (6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)
4.12 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A;

(6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0)
Properties
SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A has the following features:
• 16 outputs, isolated in two groups of 8
• Output current 2 A
• Rated load voltage 24 V DC
The status LEDs indicate the system state even if the front connector is not connected.
Special points to note when commissioning

Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, order number 6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0,
differs from digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, order number
6ES7422-1BH10-0AA0, in the following feature:
To commission the module, it is not necessary to supply each group of 8 outputs with load
voltage (e.g. connection of 1L+ and 3L+). The module is fully functional even if only one
group is supplied with L+.
Note
Any switch-off of all outputs by switching off a single L+ supply implemented with the previous
module 6ES7422-1BH10-0AA0 is no longer possible.

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A
Process Module
1
Front connector jumper 2
3 1L+
4 0
5
1st supply group 6 1
7
8 2
Data memory and bus control

9
2nd supply group
3
11
12
13 2L+
14 2L+
15 4
16
3rd supply group 17 5
18
19 6
4th supply group 20
21 7
22
23 1M
24
25 3L+
26 3L+
27 0
28
5th supply group 29 1
30
31 2
32
6th supply group 33 3
34
35
36
37 4L+
38 4L+
39 4
40
7th supply group
LED control
41 5
42
43 6
8th supply group 44
45 7
46
47 2M
48 2M
Figure 4-9 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A

Digital modules
Technical specifications for SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A
Article number 6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0

Supply voltage
Load voltage L+
Input current
from load voltage L+ (without load), max. 30 mA
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 5W
Digital outputs
Number of digital outputs 16
Short-circuit protection Yes; Clocked electronically
• Response threshold, typ. 2.8 to 6 A
Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to -30 V
Controlling a digital input Yes; possible
Switching capacity of the outputs
• on lamp load, max. 10 W
Load resistance range
• lower limit 24 Ω
• upper limit 4 kΩ
Output voltage
• for signal "1", min. L+ (-0.5 V)
Output current
• for signal "1" rated value 2A
• for signal "1" permissible range, min. 5 mA
• for signal "1" permissible range, max. 2.4 A
• for signal "0" residual current, max. 0.5 mA
Output delay with resistive load
• "0" to "1", max. 1 ms
• "1" to "0", max. 1 ms
Parallel switching of two outputs
• for uprating No; Not possible
• for redundant control of a load Yes; possible (only outputs of the same group)
Switching frequency
• with resistive load, max. 100 Hz
• with inductive load, max. 0.1 Hz
• with inductive load (acc. to IEC 60947-5-1, 0.2 Hz; 0.2 Hz at 1 A; 0.1 Hz at 2 A
DC13), max.
• on lamp load, max. 10 Hz
Total current of the outputs (per group)

Digital modules
Article number 6ES7422-1BH11-0AA0

all mounting positions
– up to 40 °C, max. 3A
– up to 60 °C, max. 2 A; 2 adjacent outputs each
Cable length
Alarms No
Potential separation digital outputs
Isolation
tested with
voltage L+
• between the outputs of different groups 500 V DC
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Digital modules
4.13 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)
4.13 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

(6ES7422-1BL00-0AA0)
Properties
SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A has the following features:
• 32 outputs, isolated in a group of 32
• Power supply in groups of 8 channels.
• A supply group always consists of 8 neighboring channels, starting from channel 0. Channels
0 to 7, 8 to 15, ... 16 to 23 and 24 to 31 each form a supply group.
• Each of these supply groups can be switched off separately by disconnecting L+; however,
you must remember the common ground connection.
• Output current 0.5 A

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422\; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Process Module
1L+ 2
3 1L+
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3

8 4
9 5
6
11 7
12
2L+ 13 2L+
14 2L+
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5
21 6
22 7
23
24
3L+ 25 3L+
26 3L+
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36
4L+ 37 4L+
38 4L+
39 0 LED control
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
48 M
L+ M
Figure 4-10 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Digital modules
Technical specifications for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Supply voltage
Load voltage L+
Input current
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 4W
Digital outputs
• Response threshold, typ. 0.7 to 1.5 A
Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to -27 V
• on lamp load, max. 5W
Output voltage
Output current
• for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A
• for signal "1" permissible range, max. 0.6 A
• "0" to "1", max. 1 ms
• "1" to "0", max. 1 ms
• for uprating Yes; possible (only outputs of the same group)
Switching frequency
• with inductive load (acc. to IEC 60947-5-1, 2 Hz; 2 Hz at 0.3 A; 0.5 Hz at 0.5 A
DC13), max.

Digital modules
4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)

– up to 60 °C, max. 2 A; 8 adjacent outputs each
Cable length
Alarms No
Isolation
tested with
voltage L+
• Load voltage L+ against backplane bus 500 V DC
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights
4.14 Digital output module SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

(6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0)
4.14.1 Features
Overview
SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A has the following features:
• 32 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8
• Output current 0.5 A

Digital modules

• Configurable substitute value output

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Process Module
INTF 1L+ monitoring

1L+ 2 EXTF Monitoring of internal voltage
3 1L+ Control
Control
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3 Channel status
8 4 Diagnostics display
9 5
10 6
7 Output status
11
1M 12 1M 1M
13 2L+
2L+
14 2L+ 2L+
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
%DFNSODQHEXVFRQQHFWLRQ
20 5
21 6
22 7
23 2M 2M
24 2M
3L+ 25 3L+
26 3L+ 3L+
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35 3M 3M
36 3M
37 4L+
4L+
38 4L+ 4L+
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47 4M
48 4M 4M
L+
24 V
Figure 4-11 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Digital modules
Technical specifications for SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Article number 6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0

Supply voltage
Load voltage L+
Input current
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 8W
Digital outputs
• Response threshold, typ. 0.75 to 1.5 A
Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to L+ (-45 V)
• on lamp load, max. 5W
Output voltage
Output current
• for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A
• for signal "1" permissible range, max. 600 A
• for uprating Yes; possible (only outputs of the same group)
Switching frequency
• with inductive load, max. 2 Hz
• with inductive load (acc. to IEC 60947-5-1, 2 Hz
DC13), max.

Digital modules
Article number 6ES7422-7BL00-0AB0

Cable length
Substitute values connectable Yes
Alarms
Diagnoses
• Wire-break Yes; <0.15 mA
• Short-circuit Yes; > 1 A (typ.)
• Status indicator digital output (green) Yes
Isolation
tested with
voltage L+
• between the outputs of different groups 500 V DC
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Digital modules
4.14.2 Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules
in the respective sections.
Parameters of SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the SM
422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A in the table below.
Table 4-12 Parameters of SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

type
Enable
Reaction to CPU STOP Set substitution val‐ SV Dynamic Module
ue (SSV)
Keep last value (KLV)
Diagnostics
• No load voltage L+/sensor supply Yes/no No Channel group
• Short-circuit to M Yes/no No Channel
• Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no No Channel
Set substitution value "1" Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
1
ER-2.
2
See also

Digital modules
4.14.3 Behavior of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Influence of the operating state and supply voltage on output values

The output values of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A depend on the operating mode of the
CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.
Table 4-13 Relationships of the analog output values on the CPU's operating state and on the L+
supply voltage
CPU operating mode Power supply L+ at digital module Output value of digital module
POWER ON RUN L+ present CPU value
L+ missing 0 signal
STOP L+ present Substitution value/last value (de‐
fault = 0 signal)
L+ missing 0 signal
POWER OFF - L+ present 0 signal
L+ missing 0 signal
Reaction to failure of the supply voltage

The failure of the supply voltage of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A is always indicated by the
EXTF LED on the module. This information is also available on the module (entry in diagnostic
data.)
See also
Assigning parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A (Page 132)

Digital modules
4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A (6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)
4.15 Digital output module SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

(6ES7422-1FF00-0AA0)
Properties
SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A has the following features:
• 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 4
• Rated load voltage 120/230 V AC

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A
Process Module
Front connector jumper 1 INTF

16 digital outputs (four to ground) 2 EXTF
Byte 0 3
4 0
5
6 1
7
2

8
9
10 3
11 1L
12 F1
13 1N
14
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22 2L
23 F2
24 2N
25
Byte 1 26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34 3L
35 F3
36 3N
37
LED control
38
39 4
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46 4L
47 F4
48 4N
Figure 4-12 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

Digital modules
Technical specifications for SM 422; DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A

Supply voltage
Load voltage L1
• Rated value (AC) 230 V; 120/230 V AC
• permissible range, lower limit (AC) 79 V
• permissible range, upper limit (AC) 264 V
• permissible frequency range, lower limit 47 Hz
• permissible frequency range, upper limit 63 Hz
Input current
from load voltage L+ (without load), max. 1.5 mA
Power loss
Digital outputs
Short-circuit protection Yes; Fuse 8 A, 250 V; per group
• required current for fuse shutdown, min. 100 A
• Response time, max. 100 ms
Size of motor starters according to NEMA, max. Size 5 according to NEMA
Spare fuses Fuse 8 A, 250 V, quick response
Zero-crossing switch No
Output voltage
• for signal "1", min. L1 (-18.1 V)
• for signal "1" (at max. current), min. L1 (-1.3 Vrms)
• for signal "1" (at min. current), min. L1 (-18.1 Vrms)
Output current
• for signal "1" permissible range, max. 2A
• for signal "1" permissible surge current, max. 50 A; per cycle
• "0" to "1", max. 1 ms
• "1" to "0", max. 1 AC cycle
• for redundant control of a load Yes; Possible (only outputs with the same load volt‐
age)
Switching frequency

Digital modules

• with inductive load (acc. to IEC 60947-5-1, 0.5 Hz
AC15), max.
– up to 40 °C, max. 4 A; 6 A with fan assembly
– up to 60 °C, max. 2 A; 5 A with fan subassembly; per 4 adjacent out‐
puts
Cable length
Alarms No
Diagnostics function Not parameterizable
• internal fault INTF (red) Yes; Fuse blown
• external fault EXTF (red) Yes; Missing load voltage
between the outputs of different groups 500 V AC
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Digital modules
Changing the fuse
Note
Injury is possible.
If you change a fuse without first unplugging the front connector of the module, you may receive
an electric shock.
Always remove the front connector before changing a fuse.

Digital modules
4.16 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A (6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)
4.16 Relay output module SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

(6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0)
Properties
SM 422; DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A has the following features:
• 16 outputs, isolated in 8 groups of 2
• Rated load voltage 230 V AC/125 V DC

Digital modules
Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A
Process Module

2
3
4 0
5 1
6 1L
7
8

9 2
10 3
11 2L
12
13
14
15 4
16 5
17 3L
18
19
20 6
21 7
22 4L
23
24
25
26
27 0
28 1
29 5L
30
31
32 2
33 3
34 6L
35
36
37
LED control
38
39 4
40 5
41 7L
42
43
44 6
45 7
46 8L
47
48
Figure 4-13 Connection and circuit diagram for SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A

Digital modules
Technical specifications for SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A
Article number 6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0

Supply voltage
Load voltage L+
• permissible range, lower limit (DC) 1V
• permissible range, upper limit (DC) 60 V
Load voltage L1
• Rated value (AC) 230 V
• permissible range, lower limit (AC) 2V
• permissible range, upper limit (AC) 264 V
Input current
from backplane bus 5 V DC, max. 1A
Power loss
Digital outputs
Number of digital outputs 16; Relays
Short-circuit protection No
Size of motor starters according to NEMA, max. Size 5 according to NEMA
Output current
• for signal "1" minimum load current 11 mA
• for uprating No; Not possible
• for redundant control of a load Yes; Possible (only outputs with the same load volt‐
age)
Switching frequency
• With inductive load (to IEC 60947-5-1, DC13/ 1 Hz
AC15), max.
• mechanical, max. 20 Hz
– up to 40 °C, max. 10 A; 10 A with fan subassembly
– up to 60 °C, max. 5 A; 10 A with fan subassembly
Relay outputs
• external protection for relay outputs Fusible link, 6 A, quick response
• Contact connection (internal) No

Digital modules
Article number 6ES7422-1HH00-0AA0

• Number of operating cycles, max. 100 000; 100 000 (AC-15 / DC-13); 3 000 000 me‐
chanical
Switching capacity of contacts
– with inductive load, max. 5 A; 5 A (30 V DC), 5 A (230 V AC)
– with resistive load, max. 5 A; 5 A (30 V DC), 5 A (230 V AC), 1.2 A (60 V DC),
0.2 A (125 V DC)
– Thermal continuous current, max. 5A
Cable length
Alarms No
• Status indicator digital output (green) Yes; per channel
between the outputs of different groups 500 V AC
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights
Note
Use a suppressor circuit in environments with high humidity and where sparks might occur at
the relay contacts. This will increase the service life of the relay contacts.
To install the suppressor circuit, connect an RC element or a varistor in parallel with the relay
contacts or load. The dimensions depend on the size of the load.

Analog modules 5
5.1 General information
Structure
This section contains the following topics:
1. Overview of the analog modules available
2. General information concerning all analog modules (such as parameter assignment and
diagnostics)
3. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, features, wiring diagram and block
diagrams, specifications and special characteristics of the module):
a) for analog input modules
b) for analog output modules
STEP 7 blocks for analog functions

You can use blocks FC 105 and FC 106 to read and output analog values in STEP 7. You will find
the FCs in the standard library of STEP 7 in the subdirectory called "S5-S7 Converting Blocks" (for
a description refer to the STEP 7 Online Help for the FCs).
Further information
The appendix describes the structure of the parameter records (data records 0 and 1) and
diagnostic information (data records 0 and 1) in the system data. You must be familiar with this
configuration if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.
The structure of diagnostic information (data records 0 and 1) is described in the system data
section of the appendix. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate
the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

Analog modules
5.2 Module overview
5.2 Module overview
Features of the analog modules

The tables below set out the main features of the analog modules. This summary is designed to
help you select the right module for your requirements.
Table 5-1 Analog input modules: Summary of features
Properties SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431;

AI 8 x 13 bit AI 8 x 14 bit AI 8 x 14 bit AI 16 x 13 AI 16 x 16 AI 8 x RTD AI 8 x 16 bit
(-1KF00-) (-1KF10-) (-1KF20-) bit bit 16 bit (-7KF00-)
(-0HH0-) (-7QH00-) (-7KF10-)
Number of inputs 8 AI for U/I 8 AI for U/I 8 AI for U/I 16 inputs 16 AI for U/I / 8 inputs 8 inputs
measure‐ measure‐ measure‐ temp. meas‐
ment ment ment urement
4 AI for re‐ 4 AI for re‐ 4 AI for re‐ 8 AI for re‐
sistance sist. / temp. sistance sistance
measure‐ measure‐ measure‐ measure‐
ment ment ment ment
Resolution 13 bits 14 bits 14 bits 13 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits
Type of measure‐ Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Resistance Voltage
ment Current Current Current Current Current Current
Resistance Resistance Resistance Resistance Temperature
Temperature Temperature
Measuring principle Integrating Integrating Instantane‐ Integrating Integrating Integrating Integrating
ous value
encoding
Configurable diag‐ No No No No Yes Yes Yes
nostics
Diagnostic interrupt No No No No Can be set Yes Yes
Threshold value No No No No Can be set Can be set Can be set
monitoring
Hardware interrupt No No No No Can be set Can be set Can be set
upon limit violation
Hardware interrupt No No No No Can be set No No
at end of cycle
Voltage relation‐ Analog section isolated from the CPU Non-isolated Analog section isolated from the CPU
ships
Maximum permit‐ between between between between between between between
ted common mode channels or channels or channels or channels or channels or channel and channels or
voltage between ref‐ between between ref‐ between ref‐ between central between
erence po‐ channel and erence po‐ erence po‐ channel and grounding channel and
tential of central tential of tential of central point: central
connected grounding connected connected grounding 60 V DC / grounding
sensors and point: sensors and sensors and point: point:
30 V AC
MANA: 60 V DC / MANA: central 60 V DC / 60 V DC /
(SELV)
30 V AC 8 V AC grounding
30 V AC 30 V AC 30 V AC
point:
(SELV) (SELV) (SELV)
2 V DC/AC

Analog modules
5.2 Module overview
Properties SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431; SM 431;

AI 8 x 13 bit AI 8 x 14 bit AI 8 x 14 bit AI 16 x 13 AI 16 x 16 AI 8 x RTD AI 8 x 16 bit
(-1KF00-) (-1KF10-) (-1KF20-) bit bit 16 bit (-7KF00-)
(-0HH0-) (-7QH00-) (-7KF10-)
External power sup‐ No 24 V DC (on‐ 24 V DC (on‐ 24 V DC (on‐ 24 V DC (on‐ No No
ply required ly with cur‐ ly with cur‐ ly with cur‐ ly with cur‐
rent, 2 rent, 2 rent, 2 rent, 2
DMU) 1 DMU) 1 DMU) 1 DMU) 1
Special features - Suitable for Rapid A/D - Suitable for Resistance Internal
temp. meas‐ change, suit‐ temp. meas‐ thermome‐ measure‐
urement able for urement ter configu‐ ment resist‐
Tempera‐ highly dy‐ Tempera‐ rable ance
ture sensor namic pro‐ ture sensor Lineariza‐ Field con‐
types config‐ cesses types config‐ tion of sen‐ nection with
urable Measured urable sor charac‐ internal ref‐
Lineariza‐ value Lineariza‐ teristic erence tem‐
tion of sen‐ smoothing tion of sen‐ curves perature (in‐
sor charac‐ can be set sor charac‐ Measured cluded in
teristic teristic value module
curves curves smoothing scope of de‐
can be set livery)
Measured Measured
value value Measured
smoothing smoothing value
can be set can be set smoothing
can be set
1
2-DMU 2-wire transducer
Table 5-2 Analog output modules: Summary of features
Properties Module
SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit
(-1HF00-)
Number of outputs 8 outputs
Resolution 13 bits
Type of output Channel by channel:
• Voltage
• Current
Configurable diagnostics No
Diagnostic interrupt No
Substitute value output No
Voltage relationships Analog section isolated from:
• the CPU
• the load voltage
Maximum permitted common mode voltage Between channels or between channels and MANA
3 V DC
Special features -

Analog modules
5.4 Representation of analog values
5.3 Steps for commissioning analog modules
Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to
commission analog modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier
or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install, commission etc. other
modules in between times.
Steps
Table 5-3 Steps from the selection of analog modules to commissioning
Step Procedure
1 Select the module.
2 For certain analog input modules: Set the measuring type and range using the measuring
range module.
3 Mount the module in the rack.
4 Assign parameters to module.
5 Connect the measuring sensors or loads to the module.
6 Commission the configuration.
7 Analyze the configuration if commissioning failed.
5.4.1 General information
Introduction
This chapter describes the analog values for all measuring or output ranges supported by the
analog modules.
Analog to digital conversion

Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form.
Analog output modules convert digital output values to analog signals.

Analog modules
Representation of analog values at a resolution of 16 bits

The digitized analog value applies to input and output values of the same nominal range. Analog
values are output as real numbers in two's complement. The resulting assignment:
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit values 2 15
2 14
2 13
2 12
211
2 10
2 9
2 8
2 7
2 6
2 5
2 4
2 3
2 2
2 1
20
Bit 15 can be interpreted as a sign

The sign of the analog value is always set at bit 15:
• "0" → +
• "1" → -
Resolution less than 16 bits

On analog modules with a resolution of less than 16 bits, the analog value is stored left-
justified. The unused least significant bit positions are padded with "0".
Example
The example below demonstrates the "0" padding of unused bit positions for low resolution
values.
Table 5-4 Example: Bit pattern of a 16-bit and 13-bit analog value
Resolution Analog value

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
16-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
13-bit analog value 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Analog modules
5.4.2 Representation of analog values of analog input channels
Introduction
The tables in this section contain the measured value representations for the various measuring
ranges of the analog input modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules with the
corresponding measuring ranges.
Notes for readers of the tables

The tables "Bipolar input ranges", "Unipolar input ranges", "Life-zero input ranges" contain the
binary representation of the measured values.
The binary representation of the measured values is always the same, so the analog
representation tables only compare the measuring ranges and the units.
Measured value resolution

The resolution of the analog values may differ, based on the analog module and module
parameters. At resolutions < 16 bits, all bits identified by "x" are set to "0".
Note
This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted temperature values are the
result of a conversion in the analog module (see tables for analog representation of resistance
thermometer and for thermometer elements).
Table 5-5 Supported analog value resolutions
Resolution in bits Unit decimal Unit hexadeci‐ Analog value Analog value
mal High byte Low byte
9 128 80H 00000000 1xxxxxxx
10 64 40H 00000000 01xxxxxx
11 32 20H 00000000 001xxxxx
12 16 10H 00000000 0001xxxx
13 8 8H 00000000 00001xxx
14 4 4H 00000000 000001xx
15 2 2H 00000000 0000001x
16 1 1H 00000000 00000001

Analog modules
5.4.3 Binary representation of input ranges
Input ranges
The input ranges shown in tables "Bipolar input ranges", "Unipolar input ranges", "Life-zero input
ranges" are defined in complementary 2-by-2 representation:
Table 5-6 Bipolar input ranges
Units Measured Data word Range

value
in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 >118,515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot range
27649 >100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
-1 - 0,003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
- 27648 - 100,000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 27649 ≤- 100,004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot range
- 32512 - 117,593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 32768 ≤- 117,596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow
Table 5-7 Unipolar input ranges
Units Measured Data word Range

value in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32767 ≧118,515 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overflow
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot range
27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Nominal range
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 - 0,003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot range
- 4864 - 17,593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-32768 ≤- 17,596 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow

Analog modules
Table 5-8 Life-zero input ranges
Units Meas‐ Data word Range

ured val‐
ue in %
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot range
27649 ≧100,004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal range
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-1 - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot range
0,003617
- 4864 - 17,593 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
In the event of a wire break, the module reports 7FFFH

Analog modules
5.4.4 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges
Table 5-9 Representation of analog values in the ±1 V to ±10 V voltage measuring ranges
System Voltage measuring range

Dec. Hex. ± 10 V ±5V ± 2.5 V ±1V
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 11.851 V 5.926 V 2.963 V 1.185 V Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100,000 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5V 2.5 V 1V
75,000 % 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V 1.875 V 0.75 V
0,003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV 180.8 µV 90.4 µV 36.17 µV
0% 0 0 0V 0V 0V 0V Nominal range
-1 FFFF
- 75,00 % - 20736 AF00 - 7.5 V - 3.75 V - 1.875 V - 0.75 V
- 100,000 % - 27648 9400 - 10 V -5V - 2.5 V -1V
- 27649 93FF Undershoot range
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 11.759 V - 5.879 V - 2.940 V - 1.176 V
- 117,596 % - 32513 80FF Underflow
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 - 11.851 V - 5.926 V - 2.963 V - 1.185 V
Table 5-10 Representation of analog values in the ±25 to ±500 mV voltage measuring ranges

Dec. Hex. ± 500 mV ± 250 mV ± 80 mV ± 50 mV ± 25 mV
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 592.6 mV 296.3 mV 94.8 mV 59.3 mV 29.6 mV Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 587.9 mV 294.0 mV 94.1 mV 58.8 mV 29.4 mV Overshoot
27649 6C01 range
100,000 % 27648 6C00 500 mV 250 mV 80 mV 50 mV 25 mV
75 % 20736 5100 375 mV 187.54 mV 60 mV 37.5 mV 18.75 mV
0,003617% 1 1 18.08 µV 9.04 µV 2.89 µV 1.81 µV 904.2 nV
0% 0 0 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV 0 mV
-1 FFFF Nominal range
- 75,00 % - 20736 AF00 - 375 mV -187.54 mV - 60 mV - 37.5 mV - 18.75 mV
- 100,000% - 27648 9400 - 500 mV - 250 mV - 80 mV - 50 mV - 25 mV
- 27649 93FF Undershoot
- 117,593% - 32512 8100 - 587.9 mV - 294.0 mV - 94.1 mV - 58.8 mV - 29.4 mV range
- 117,596% - 32513 80FF Underflow
- 118,519% - 32768 8000 - 592.6mV - 296.3 mV - 94.8mV - 59.3 mV - 29.6 mV

Analog modules
Table 5-11 Representation of analog values in the voltage measuring ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V

Dec. Hex. 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 5.741 V 11.852 V Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 5.704 V 11.759 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100,000 % 27648 6C00 5V 10 V
75 % 20736 5100 3.75 V 7.5 V Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 1 V + 144.7 µV 0 V + 361.7 µV
0% 0 0 1V 0V
-1 FFFF Undershoot range
- 17,593 % - 4864 ED00 0.296 V Negative values are not
supported Wire break
≤-17,596 % 32767 7FFF

Analog modules
5.4.5 Representation of analog values in the current measuring ranges
Table 5-12 Representation of analog values in the ±3.2 mA to ±20 mA current measuring ranges
System Current measuring range

Dec. Hex. ± 20 mA ± 10 mA ± 5 mA ± 3.2 mA
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 23.70 mA 11.85 mA 5.93 mA 3.79 mA Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 11.76 mA 5.88 mA 3.76 mA Overshoot
27649 6C01 range
100,000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 10 mA 5 mA 3.2 mA
75 % 20736 5100 15 mA 7.5 mA 3.75 mA 2.4 mA
0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA 361.7 nA 180.8 nA 115.7 nA Nominal range
0% 0 0 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA
-1 FFFF
- 75 % - 20736 AF00 - 15 mA - 7.5 mA - 3.75 mA - 2.4 mA
- 100,000 % - 27648 9400 - 20 mA - 10 mA - 5 mA - 3.2 mA
- 27649 93FF Undershoot
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 23.52 mA - 11.76 mA - 5.88 mA - 3.76 mA range
- 117,596 % - 32513 80FF Underflow
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 - 23.70 mA - 11.85 mA - 5.93 mA - 3.79 mA
Table 5-13 Representation of analog values in current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 23.70 mA Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100,000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
75 % 20736 5100 15 mA Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA
- 17,593 % - 4864 ED00 - 3.52 mA
- 4865 ECFF Underflow
≤ - 17,596 % - 32768 8000

Analog modules
Table 5-14 Representation of analog values in current measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA

Dec. Hex. 4 to 20 mA
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 22.96 mA Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
27649 6C01
100,000 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
0,003617 % 1 1 4 mA + 578.7 nA
0% 0 0 4 mA
- 17,593 % - 4864 ED00 1.185 mA
Wire break
≤ - 17,596 % 32767 7FFF

Analog modules
5.4.6 Representation of analog values for resistance-type sensors
Table 5-15 Analog value representation for resistance-type sensors from 48 Ω to 6 kΩ
System Resistive transducer range

Dec. Hex. 48 Ω 150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 6 kΩ
118,515 % 32767 7FFF 56.89 Ω 177.77 Ω 355.54 Ω 711.09 Ω 7.11 kΩ Overflow
117,593 % 32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 56.44 Ω 176.38 Ω 352.77 Ω 705.53 Ω 7.06 kΩ Overshoot
27649 6C01 range
100,000 % 27648 6C00 48 Ω 150 Ω 300 Ω 600 Ω 6 kΩ Nominal range
75 % 20736 5100 36 Ω 112.5 Ω 225 Ω 450 Ω 4.5 kΩ
0,003617 % 1 1 1.74 mΩ 5.43 mΩ 10.85 mΩ 21.70 mΩ 217.0 mΩ
0% 0 0 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω 0Ω
(negative values are physically impossible) Undershoot
range

Analog modules
5.4.7 Representation of analog values for resistance thermometer
Representation of the analog values of Pt x00 standard resistance thermometers
Table 5-16 Representation of analog values for Pt 100/200/500/1000 resistance thermometers
Pt x00 Unit Unit Pt x00 Unit Unit Pt x00 Unit Unit Range
Standard in decimal hexade‐ Standard in decimal hexa‐ Standard in decimal hexa‐
°C cimal °F decimal K decimal
(1 digit (1 digit (1 digit
= 0.1° C) = 0.1 ° F) = 0.1 K)
> 1000,0 32767 7FFFH > 1832,0 32767 7FFFH > 1273,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
1000,0 10000 2710H 1832,0 18320 4790H 1273,2 12732 31BCH Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
850,1 8501 2135H 1562,1 15621 3D05H 1123,3 11233 2BE1H
850,0 8500 2134H 1562,0 15620 3D04H 1123,2 11232 2BE0H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200,0 -2000 F830H -328,0 -3280 F330H 73,2 732 2DCH
-200,1 -2001 F82FH -328,1 -3281 F32FH 73,1 731 2DBH Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-243,0 -2430 F682H -405,4 -4054 F02AH 30,2 302 12EH
< -243,0 -32768 8000H < -405,4 -32768 8000H < 30,2 32768 8000H Underflow
Representation of analog values for Pt x00 climatic resistance thermometers
Table 5-17 Representation of analog values for Pt 100/200/500/1000 resistance thermometers
Pt x00 Cli‐ Unit Unit Pt x00 Cli‐ Unit Unit Range

matic in °C decimal hexa‐ matic in °F decimal hexa‐
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.01° C) 0.01 °F)
> 155,00 32767 7FFFH > 311,00 32767 7FFFH Overflow
155,00 15500 3C8CH 311,00 31100 797CH Overshoot range
: : : : : :
130,01 13001 32C9H 266,01 26601 67E9H
130,00 13000 32C8H 266,00 26600 67E8H Nominal range
: : : : : :
-120,00 -12000 D120H -184,00 -18400 B820H
-120,01 -12001 D11FH -184,01 -18401 B81FH Undershoot range
: : : : : :
-145,00 -14500 C75CH -229,00 -22900 A68CH
< - 145,00 -32768 8000H < -229,00 -32768 8000H Underflow

Analog modules
Representation of analog values for Ni x00 standard resistance thermometers
Table 5-18 Analog value representation for resistance thermometers Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000
Ni x00 Unit Unit Ni x00 Unit Unit Ni x00 Unit Unit Range
Standard in decimal hexa‐ Standard in decimal hexa‐ standard in decimal hexa‐
°C (1 digit = decimal °F (1 digit = decimal K (1 digit = decimal
0.1° C) 0.1 °F) 0.1 K)
295,0 2950 B86H 563,0 5630 15FEH 568,2 5682 1632H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
250,1 2501 9C5H 482,1 4821 12D5H 523,3 5233 1471H
250,0 2500 9C4H 482,0 4820 12D4H 523,2 5232 1470H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-60,0 -600 FDA8H -76,0 -760 FD08H 213,2 2132 854H
-60,1 -601 FDA7H -76,1 -761 FD07H 213,1 2131 853H Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-105,0 -1050 FBE6H -157,0 -1570 F9DEH 168,2 1682 692H
< -105,0 -32768 8000H < -157,0 -32768 8000H < 168,2 32768 8000H Underflow
Representation of analog values for Ni x00 climatic resistance thermometers
Table 5-19 Analog value representation for resistance thermometers Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000
Ni x00 Cli‐ Unit Unit Ni x00 Cli‐ Unit Unit Range

matic in °C decimal hexa‐ matic in °F decimal hexa‐
(1 digit = decimal (1 digit = decimal
0.01° C) 0.01 °F)
> 295,00 32767 7FFFH > 325,11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
295,00 29500 733CH 327,66 32766 7FFEH Overshoot range
: : : : : :
250,01 25001 61A9H 280,01 28001 6D61H
250,00 25000 61A8H 280,00 28000 6D60H Nominal range
: : : : : :
-60,00 -6000 E890H -76,00 -7600 E250H
-60,01 -6001 E88FH -76,01 -7601 E24FH Undershoot range
: : : : : :
-105,00 -10500 D6FCH -157,00 -15700 C2ACH
< -105,00 -32768 8000H < -157,00 -32768 8000H Underflow

Analog modules
Representation of analog values for Cu 10 standard resistance thermometers
Table 5-20 Representation of analog values for Cu 10 standard resistance thermometers
Cu 10 Unit Unit Cu 10 Unit Unit Cu 10 Unit Unit Range

Standard in decimal hexa‐ Standard in decimal hexa‐ Standard in decimal hexa‐
°C (1 digit = decimal °F (1 digit = decimal K (1 digit = decimal
0.01° C) 0.01° F) 0.01 K)
312,0 3120 C30H 593,6 5936 1730H 585,2 5852 16DCH Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
260,1 2601 A29H 500,1 5001 12D5H 533,3 5333 14D5H
260,0 2600 A28H 500,0 5000 1389H 533,2 5332 14D4H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200,0 -2000 F830H -328,0 -3280 F330H 73,2 732 2DCH
-200,1 -2001 F82FH -328,1 -3281 F32FH 73,1 731 2DBH Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-240,0 -2400 F6A0H -400,0 -4000 F060H 33,2 332 14CH
< -240,0 -32768 8000H < -400,0 -32768 8000H < 33,2 32768 8000H Underflow
Representation of analog values for Cu 10 climatic resistance thermometers
Table 5-21 Representation of analog values for Cu 10 climatic resistance thermometers
Cu 10 Cli‐ Unit deci‐ Unit hexadec‐ Cu 10 Climatic in Unit decimal Unit hexadeci‐ Range
matic in °C mal imal °F (1 digit = 0.01° mal
(1 digit = F)
0.01° C)
> 180,00 32767 7FFFH >325,11 32767 7FFFH Overflow
180,00 18000 4650H 327,66 32766 7FFEH Overshoot range
: : : : : :
150,01 15001 3A99H 280,01 28001 6D61H
150,00 15000 3A98H 280,00 28000 6D60H Nominal range
: : : : : :
-50,00 -5000 EC78H -58,00 -5800 E958H
-50,01 -5001 EC77H -58,01 -5801 E957H Undershoot range
: : : : : :
-60,00 -6000 E890H -76,00 -7600 E250H
< -60,00 -32768 8000H < -76,00 -32768 8000H Underflow

Analog modules
5.4.8 Representation of analog values for thermocouples
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type B
Table 5-22 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type B
Type B in °C Unit Unit Type B in °F Unit Unit Type B in K Unit Unit Range
decimal decimal decimal hexa‐ decimal hexa‐
decimal decimal
> 2070,0 32767 7FFFH >3276,6 3276,6 7FFFH > 2343,2 32767 7FFFH Overflow
2070,0 20700 50DCH 3276,6 32766 7FFEH 2343,2 23432 5B88H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1821,0 18210 4722H 2786,6 27866 6CDAH 2094,2 20942 51CEH
1820,0 18200 4718H 2786,5 27865 6CD9H 2093,2 20932 51C4H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
0,0 0 0000H -32,0 -320 FEC0H 273,2 2732 0AACH
Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-120,0 -1200 FB50H -184,0 -1840 F8D0H 153,2 1532 05FCH
< -120,0 -32768 8000H < -184,0 -32768 8000H < 153,2 32768 8000H Underflow
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type E
Table 5-23 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type E
Type E in °C Unit dec‐ Unit Type E in °F Unit Unit Type E in K Unit Unit Range
imal hexa‐ decimal hexa‐ decimal hexa‐
decimal decimal decimal
1200,0 12000 2EE0H 2192,0 21920 55A0H 1473,2 14732 398CH Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1000,1 10001 2711H 1833,8 18338 47A2H 1274,2 12742 31C6H
1000,0 10000 2710H 1832,0 18320 4790H 1273,2 12732 31BCH Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270,0 -2700 F574H -454,0 -4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H < -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H <0 <0 <0000H Underflow
Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong type
of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...
... F0C4H, and to output 8000H. ... FB70H, and to output 8000H. ... E5D4H, and to output 8000H.

Analog modules
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type J
Table 5-24 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type J
Type J in °C Unit dec‐ Unit Type J in °F Unit Unit Type J in K Unit Unit Range
1450,0 14500 38A4H 2642,0 26420 6734H 1723,2 17232 4350H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1201,0 12010 2EEAH 2193,8 21938 55B2H 1474,2 14742 3996H
1200,0 12000 2EE0H 2192,0 21920 55A0H 1473,2 14732 398CH Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-210,0 -2100 F7CCH -346,0 -3460 F27CH 63,2 632 0278H
< -210,0 < -2100 <F7CCH < -346,0 < -3460 <F27CH < 63,2 < 632 < 0278H Underflow
... F31CH, and to output 8000H. ... EA0CH, and to output 8000H. ... FDC8H, and to output 8000H.
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type K
Table 5-25 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type K
Type K in °C Unit dec‐ Unit Type K in °F Unit Unit Type K in K Unit Unit Range
1622,0 16220 3F5CH 2951,6 29516 734CH 1895,2 18952 4A08H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1373,0 13730 35A2H 2503,4 25034 61CAH 1646,2 16462 404EH
1372,0 13720 3598H 2501,6 25016 61B8H 1645,2 16452 4044H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270,0 -2700 F574H -454,0 -4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H < -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H <0 <0 < 0000H Underflow
... F0C4H, and to output 8000H. ... E5D4H, and to output 8000H. ... FB70H, and to output 8000H.

Analog modules
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type L
Table 5-26 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type L
Type L in °C Unit dec‐ Unit hex‐ Type L in °F Unit Unit Type L in K Unit Unit Range
imal adecimal decimal hexa‐ decimal hexa‐
decimal decimal
1150,0 11500 2CECH 2102,0 21020 521CH 1423,2 14232 3798H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
901,0 9010 2332H 1653,8 16538 409AH 1174,2 11742 2DDEH
900,0 9000 2328H 1652,0 16520 4088H 1173,2 11732 2DD4H Nominal
: : : : : : : : : range
-200,0 -2000 F830H -328,0 -3280 F330H 73,2 732 02DCH
< -200,0 < -2000 < F830H < -328,0 < -3280 < F330H < 73,2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
... F380H, and to output 8000H. ... EAC0H, and to output 8000H. ... FE2CH, and to output 8000H.
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type N
Table 5-27 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type N
Type N in °C Unit dec‐ Unit Type N in °F Unit Unit Type N in K Unit Unit Range
1550,0 15500 3C8CH 2822,0 28220 6E3CH 1823,2 18232 4738H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1300,1 13001 32C9H 2373,8 23738 5CBAH 1574,2 15742 3D7EH
1300,0 13000 32C8H 2372,0 23720 5CA8H 1573,2 15732 3D74H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270,0 -2700 F574H -454,0 -4540 EE44H 0 0 0000H
< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H < -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H <0 <0 < 0000H Underflow

Analog modules
Representation of analog values for thermocouple types R, S
Table 5-28 Representation of analog values for thermocouple types R, S
Type R, S in Unit Unit Type R, S in Unit Unit Types R, S Unit Unit Range
°C decimal hexa‐ °F decimal hexa‐ in K decimal hexa‐
2019,0 20190 4EDEH 3276,6 32766 7FFEH 2292,2 22922 598AH Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
1770,0 17770 4524H 3218,0 32180 7DB4H 2043,2 20432 4FD0H
1769,0 17690 451AH 3216,2 32162 7DA2H 2042,2 20422 4FC6H Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-50,0 -500 FE0CH -58,0 -580 FDBCH 223,2 2232 08B8H
-51,0 -510 FE02H -59,8 -598 FDAAH 222,2 2222 08AEH Undershoot
: : : : : : : : : range
-170,0 -1700 F95CH -274,0 -2740 F54CH 103,2 1032 0408H
< -170,0 -32768 8000H < -274,0 -32768 8000H < 103-2 < 1032 8000H Underflow
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type T
Table 5-29 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type T
Type T in °C Unit Unit Type T in °F Unit Unit Type T in K Unit Unit Range
decimal hexa‐ decimal hexa‐ decimal hexa‐
540,0 5400 1518H 1004,0 10040 2738H 813,2 8132 1FC4H Overshoot
: : : range
401,0 4010 0FAAH
400,0 4000 0FA0H 752,0 7520 1D60H 673,2 6732 1AACH Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-270,0 -2700 F574H -454,0 -4540 EE44H 3,2 32 0020H
< -270,0 < -2700 < F574H < -454,0 < -4540 <EE44H < 3,2 < 32 < 0020H Underflow
Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong
type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...

Analog modules
Representation of analog values for thermocouples type U
Table 5-30 Representation of analog values for thermocouples type U
Type U in °C Unit Unit Type U in °F Unit Unit Type U in K Unit Unit Range
decimal hexa‐ decimal hexa‐ decimal hexa‐
850,0 8500 2134H 1562,0 15620 2738,0H 1123,2 11232 2BE0H Overshoot
: : : : : : : : : range
601,0 6010 177AH 1113,8 11138 2B82H 874,2 8742 2226H
600,0 6000 1770H 1112,0 11120 2B70H 873,2 8732 221CH Nominal range
: : : : : : : : :
-200,0 -2000 F830H -328,0 -3280 F330H 73,2 732 02DCH
< -200,0 < -2000 < F830H < -328,0 < -3280 < F330H < 73,2 < 732 <02DCH Underflow
Faulty wiring (polarity reversal, or open inputs, for example), or sensor error in the negative range (wrong
type of thermocouple, for example) will cause the analog input module to signal underflow, starting at ...
... F380H, and to output 8000H. ... EAC0H, and to output 8000H. ... FE2CH, and to output 8000H.

Analog modules
5.4.9 Representation of analog values for analog output channels
Introduction
The tables in this section contain the analog value representation for output channels of the
analog output modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding
output ranges.
Notes for readers of the tables

The tables "Bipolar output ranges", "Unipolar output ranges", "Life-zero output ranges" contain
the binary representation of the measured values.
Since the binary representation of the output values is always the same, starting with the
table at "Representation of Analog Values in the Voltage Output Range ± 10 V" these tables
only contain the output ranges and the units.
Binary representation of output ranges

The input ranges shown in tables "Bipolar output ranges", "Unipolar output ranges", "Life-zero
output ranges" are defined in complementary 2-by-2 representation:
Table 5-31 Bipolar output ranges
Units Output Data word Range

value in
%
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
≧3251 0 % 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 x x x x x x x x Overflow
2
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot
27649 ≧100,00 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
4
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 1 -0,00361 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
7
- -100,000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
27648
- ≤100,004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
27649 Undershoot
- -117,593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 range
32512
≤ 0% 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow
32513

Analog modules
Table 5-32 Unipolar output ranges

value in
%
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
2
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot
27649 ≧100,00 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
4
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 1 0,000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited to
- 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 the low limit
32512 of the nomi‐
nal range, 0
V or 0 mA
≤ 0% 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow
32513
Table 5-33 Life-zero input ranges

value in
%
215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
2
32511 117,589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Overshoot
27649 ≧100,00 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
4
27648 100,000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Nominal
1 0,003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 range
0 0,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 1 -0,00361 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Undershoot
7 range
- 6912 -25,000 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
- 6913 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Limited to
overshoot
range lower
limit 0 V and
-25,000 0 mA
-
32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
≤-3251 - 25 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x Underflow
3

Analog modules
Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges
Table 5-34 Representation of analog values in the ±10 V output range
System Voltage output range

Dec. Hex. ±10 V
118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 V Overflow, off power
32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 11.76 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V
75 % 20736 5100 7.5 V Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV
0% 0 0 0V
-1 FFFF - 361.7 µV
- 75 % - 20736 AF00 - 7.5 V
- 100 % - 27648 9400 - 10 V
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 11.76 V
- 32513 80FF Underflow, idle state
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 V
Table 5-35 Representation of analog values in the 0 V to 10 V and 1 V to 5 V output ranges
System Voltage output range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V
118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 V 0.00 V Overflow, off power
32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 11.76 V 5.70 V Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 10 V 5V
75 % 20736 5100 7.5 V 3.75 V Nominal range
0,003617 % 1 1 361.7 µV 1V+144.7µV
0% 0 0 0V 1V
- 25 % - 6912 E500 0V
- 6913 E4FF Not possible. The output value is limi‐
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 ted to 0 V.
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 V 0.00 V

Analog modules
Representation of analog values in the current output ranges
Table 5-36 Representation of analog values in the ±20 mA output range
System Current output range

Dec. Hex. ± 20 mA
118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA Overflow, off power
32512 7F00
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA
0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 mA
0% 0 0 0 mA
-1 FFFF - 723.4 mA
- 75 % - 20736 AF00 - 15 mA
- 100 % - 27648 9400 - 20 mA
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 - 23.52 mA
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 mA
Table 5-37 Representation of analog values in the 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA output ranges
System Current output range

Dec. Hex. 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
118,5149 % 32767 7FFF 0.00 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, off power
32512 7F00
117,589 % 32511 7EFF 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overshoot range
27649 6C01
100 % 27648 6C00 20 mA 20 mA Nominal range
75 % 20736 5100 15 mA 15 mA
0,003617 % 1 1 723.4 mA 4mA+578.7 nA
0% 0 0 0 mA 4 mA
- 25 % - 6912 E500 0 mA
- 6913 E4FF Not possible. Output value
- 117,593 % - 32512 8100 limited to 0 mA.
- 118,519 % - 32768 8000 0.00 mA 0.00 mA

Analog modules
5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input channels
5.5 Setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input

channels
Two procedures
There are two procedures for setting the measuring method and ranges of analog input
channels of analog modules:
• With a measuring range module and STEP 7
• By hardwiring the analog input channel, and programming in STEP 7
The method to use for the various analog modules is module-specific, and described in detail
in the relevant module sections.
The procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the module in STEP
7 is described in the respective sections.
This section describes how to set the measuring method and range using measuring range
modules.
Setting the measuring method and range using measuring range modules
Analog modules are supplied with measuring range modules as required.
Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method and range.
Note
Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input module.
Before you install the analog input module, check the measuring method and range of the
measuring range modules, and adapt these as required.
Optional settings of the measuring range modules

Optional settings of the measuring range modules are: "A", "B", "C" and "D".
For detailed information on specific measuring method and range settings, refer to the
relevant module section.
The settings for the various measuring methods and ranges are also shown on the printed
label of the analog module.

Analog modules
Replugging measuring range modules

To reconnect a measuring range module:
Graphic Description
Use a screwdriver to lever the measur‐
ing range module out of the analog in‐
put module.

Analog modules
Graphic Description
Insert the measuring range module in‐
to the required slot (1) of the analog
input module.
The measuring range selected is the
one that points to the marker point on
module (2).
Continue with the insertion of all other
measuring range modules.
Then mount the module.
CAUTION
Danger of damage to equipment.
Faulty measuring range module settings may lead to the destruction of the module.
Always make sure the measuring range module is in the correct position before you connect
any sensors to the module.

Analog modules
5.6 Behavior of the analog modules
5.6.1 Introduction
Overview
This section describes:
• How the analog input and output values depend on the operating states of the CPU and the
supply voltage of the analog module
• The reaction of analog modules, based on the actual analog value within the relevant value
range
• The effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability
• The effect of the operational limit of the analog module on the analog input and output
value, as illustrated by an example

Analog modules
5.6.2 Effect of supply voltage and operating mode
Overview
The IO values of analog modules are determined by the CPU operating state and the module's
supply voltage.
Table 5-38 Dependencies of the analog IO values on the CPU's operating State and on the L+ supply voltage
CPU operating state Supply voltage L+ at the Output value of the Input value of the
analog module analog output module analog input module*
POWER RUN L+ present CPU values Measured value
ON Until the first conversion... 7FFFH, until the first conversion
• after power-up has been com‐ after POWER ON is completed, or
when the module has been pro‐
pleted, a signal of 0 mA or 0 V is
grammed.
output.
• after programming is successful‐
ly completed, it outputs the pre‐
vious value.
L+ missing 0 mA / 0 V
POWER STOP L+ present Substitution value / last value Measured value
ON (default: 0 mA / 0 V) 7FFFH, until the first conversion
L+ missing 0 mA / 0 V after POWER ON is completed, or
when the module has been pro‐
grammed.
POWER - L+ present 0 mA / 0 V -
OFF L+ missing 0 mA / 0 V -
* L+ only required with 2-wire sensors
Behavior on failure of the supply voltage

Failure of the load power supply L+ of the diagnostics-capable analog module is indicated in the
case of configured 2-wire sensors by the EXTF LED on the module. This information is also
available on the module (in the diagnostic buffer data.)
See also

Analog modules
5.6.3 Effect of the value range for analog values
Effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability

Errors may lead to an entry in the diagnostics buffer and trigger a diagnostic interrupt at analog
modules with diagnostics function and corresponding parameter settings. You will find the
errors that might be involved in the section "Diagnostics of the analog modules".
Effect of value range on the analog input module

The reaction of analog modules is determined by the actual input values within the value range.
Table 5-39 Reaction of analog input modules as a function of the actual analog value within the value range
Measured value within Input value LED (EXTF) Diagnostics Interrupt

Nominal range Measured value - - -
Overshoot/undershoot range Measured value - - -
Overflow 7FFFH lit 1
Entry is made1
Diagnostic interrupt1
Underflow 8000H lit1 Entry is made1 Diagnostic interrupt1
Outside of the programmed limit Measured value - - Hardware interrupt1
1
Only for modules with diagnostics function and depending on parameter settings
Effect of value range on the analog output module

The reaction of analog modules is determined by the actual output values within the value
range.
Table 5-40 Behavior of the analog output modules as a function of the position of the analog value within the value range
Output value within Output value LED (EXTF) Diagnostics Interrupt

Nominal range CPU value - - -
Overshoot/undershoot range CPU value - - -
Overflow 0 signal - - -
Underflow 0 signal - - -

Analog modules
5.6.4 Effect of operational limit and basic error limit
Operational limit
The operational limit represents the measuring error, or output error, of an analog module
across the entire permissible temperature range of the module, based on the module's nominal
range.
Basic error limit

The basic error limit represents the operational limit at 25° C, based on the module's nominal
range.
Note
The percentage details of operational and basic error limits in the specifications of the modules
always refer to the highest possible input and output value in the nominal range of the module.
In the ± 10 V measurement range this would be the 10 V.
Example of determination of the output error of a module

An analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit is being used for voltage output. An output
range of "±10 V" is set. The module is operating at an ambient temperature of 30° C, i.e. the
operational limit applies. The specifications of the module state:
• Operational limit for voltage output: ±0,5 %
Hence, an output error of ±0.05 V (±0.5 % of 10 V) across the nominal range of the module
must be expected.
This means that with an actual voltage of, say, 1 V, a value in the range from 0.95 V to 1.05 V
is output by the module. The relative error is ±5 % in this case.
For the example, the figure below shows how the relative error decreases as the output value
approaches the end of the 10V range.
±0,05 V ±0,05 V ±0,05 V

^ ±5 %)
(= ^ ±0,625 %)
(= ^ ±0,5 %*)
(=
1
-1 V 0V 1V 8V 10 V
Figure 5-1 Example of the relative error of an analog output module
* Operational limit
(1) Output value

Analog modules
5.7 Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules
Conversion time of analog input channels

The conversion time is the total of the basic conversion time plus additional processing times of
the module for:
• Resistance measurement
• Wire break monitoring
The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method of the analog input
channel (integrating method, actual value conversion.)
The integration time of integrating conversions has a direct influence on conversion times.
The integration time depends on the interference frequency suppression you set in STEP 7.
For information on basic conversion times and additional processing times of the various
analog modules, refer to the specifications of the relevant module.
Cycle time of analog input channels

The analog/digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to memory or
to the backplane bus take place sequentially. In other words, the analog input channels are
converted one after the other. The scan time - in other words, the time elapsing until an analog
input value is again converted - is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input
channels of the analog input module.
The figure below provides an overview of the cycle time elements for an n-channel analog
module.
Conversion time, channel 1

Cycle time
Figure 5-2 Scan time of an analog input or output module
Basic execution time of the analog input channels

The basic execution time corresponds to the cycle time for all the enabled channels.
Setting of the smoothing of analog values

You can set the smoothing of the analog values in STEP 7 for some analog input modules.

Analog modules
Use of smoothing
Smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing.
It makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured values, for
example, with temperature measurements.
Smoothing principle
The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. Smoothing is accomplished by the
module calculating mean values, derived from a defined number of converted (digitized) analog
values.
The user assigns parameters to smoothing with a maximum of four levels (none, weak,
medium, strong). The grade determines the number of analog signals used for averaging.
A higher smoothing provides a more reliable analog value, and prolongs the time it takes to
apply a smoothed analog signal following a step response (see the example below.)
Example
The figure below shows the number of cycles a module requires to apply an almost 100% analog
value after a step response, based on the smoothing function settings. The figure applies to all
signal changes at the analog input.
Signal variation in Step response for any analog input signal

percent
100
63
50
0 50 100 150 200

Smoothing Low: Module cycles
average:
high:
Figure 5-3 Example of the effect of smoothing on step responses
Further information on smoothing

For information showing whether a specific module supports smoothing functions, and special
features to observe, refer to the section dealing with the analog input module.

Analog modules
Conversion time of the analog output channels

The conversion time of the analog output channels includes the transfer of digitized output
values from internal memory, and their digital-to-analog conversion.
Cycle time of analog output channels

The analog output channels are converted sequentially - that is the analog output channels are
converted one after the other.
The cycle time - that is the time expiring until an analog output value is converted again,
is equivalent to the accumulated conversion times of all activated analog output channels.
Refer to the figure "Cycle Time of an Analog Input/Output Channel".
Basic execution time of the analog output channels

The basic execution time corresponds to the cycle time for all the enabled channels.
Note
You should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan time in STEP
7.
Overview of the settling time and response time of the analog output modules
tA
tE
tZ
t1 t2 t3
Figure 5-4 Settling and response times of the analog output channels
tA = Response time
tS = Setting time
t3 = Specified output value reached
t2 = Output value transferred and converted
tC = Cycle time, corresponds to n x conversion time (n = activated channels)
t1 = New output value is present
Settling time
The settling time (t2 to t3) - that is the time from the application of the converted value until the
specified value is obtained at the analog output - depends on the load. We therefore distinguish
between resistive, capacitive and inductive load.
For information on settling times as a function of load at the various analog output modules,
refer to the specifications of the relevant module.

Analog modules
5.8 Assigning parameters to analog modules
Response time
The response time (t1 to t3) - that is the time from the application of the digital output values in
internal memory until the specified value is obtained at the analog output - is, in the most
unfavorable case, the sum of the cycle time and the settling time.
The worst case scenario is given, when the analog channel has been converted immediately
before a new output value is transferred, and is not converted again until all other channels
have been converted (cycle time.)
See also
Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (Page 213)
5.8.1 General information about parameter assignment
Introduction
The characteristics of analog modules may differ. The characteristics of the modules can be
defined by assigning parameters.
Tools for parameter assignment

You program analog modules in STEP 7.
After you have defined all parameters, download these from your programming device to the
CPU. The CPU transfers the parameters to the relevant analog modules at the STOP > RUN
transition.
Static and dynamic parameters

The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.
You may also edit dynamic parameters in the active user program of an S7 PLC using SFCs.
However, the parameters set in STEP 7 will be applied again after a RUN > STOP, STOP > RUN
transition of the CPU. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules in
the user program in the Appendix.
Configuration in RUN (CiR)

CiR (Configuration in RUN) is a method you can use to modify your system or edit the parameters
of individual modules. These changes are made while your system is in operation, that is, your
CPU will stay in RUN over a maximum of 2.5 seconds while these changes are applied.

Analog modules
For detailed information on this topic, refer to the "Configuration in RUN by means of CiR"
manual. This manual is found, for example, as a file in PDF format on the STEP 7 CD supplied.

Analog modules
5.8.2 Parameters of analog input modules
Overview
Analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and value range listed in the table below,
based on their functionality. For information on subsets "supported" by specific analog modules,
refer to the section dealing with the relevant module.
Table 5-41 Parameters of analog input modules

type
Enable
• Destination CPU for inter‐ 1 to 4 - Static Module
rupt
• End of scan cycle reached Yes/no No Static Channel
at input
May be restricted by the measuring range
• High limit 32511 to - 32512 - Dynamic Channel
• Low limit -32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
• Wire break Yes/no No
• Reference channel error Yes/no No
• Underflow Yes/no No
• Overflow Yes/no No
• Short-circuit to M Yes/no No
Static Channel
Measurement
• Measuring method Disabled U
U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire sensor)
R-4L Resistance (4-conductor con‐
nection) Static Channel
R-3L Resistance (3-conductor con‐
nection)
RTD-4L Thermal resistance (linear, 4-
conductor connection)
RTD-3L Thermal resistance (linear, 3-
conductor connection)
TC-L Thermocouple (linear)

Analog modules

type
• Measuring range For information on configurable measuring ± 10 V
ranges of the input channels, refer to the rel‐
evant module description.
• Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67° C 0° C Dynamic Module
• Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit; Kelvin Degrees Cel‐ Static Module
sius
• Temperature coefficient Platinum (Pt) 0,00385 Static Channel
for temperature measure‐ 0.00385 Ω/Ω/° C
ment with thermal resist‐ 0.003916 Ω/Ω/° C
ance (RTD) 0.003902 Ω/Ω/° C
0.003920 Ω/Ω/° C
Nickel (Ni)
0.00618 Ω/Ω/° C
0.00672 Ω/Ω/° C
• Interference frequency 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz; none 50 or 60 Hz
suppression
• Smoothing None None
Weak
Medium
Strong
• Reference junction None None
internal
RTD on channel 0
dynamic reference temperature value
1
ER-2.
2
Only in the CR (central rack) is it possible to start up the analog modules with the default settings.
See also

Analog modules
5.8.3 Parameters of analog output modules
Overview
Analog output modules use a subset of the parameters and value range listed in the table below,
based on their functionality. For information on subsets "supported" by specific analog modules,
refer to the section dealing with the relevant module.
The default settings apply if you have not set any parameters in STEP 7.
Table 5-42 Parameters of analog output modules
Parameters Value range Default set‐ Parameter Scope

ting1 type
Output
• Output type Deactivated U Static Channel
voltage
current
• Output range For information on configurable measuring rang‐ ± 10 V
es of output channels, refer to the relevant mod‐
ule description.
1
See also

Analog modules
5.9 Connecting sensors to analog inputs
Introduction
The analog input modules support various sensors, such as voltage/current sensors, and
resistors, depending on the set measuring method.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection
options for sensors described in the sections that follow.
Cables for analog signals

Always use shielded twisted-pair cables to wire analog signals. This reduces interference.
Connect both ends of the analog cable shield to ground.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current,
which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog signals. To avoid this
situation, you should ground the shield only at one end of the cable.
Non-isolated analog input modules

In the case of the non-isolated analog input modules there is an electrical connection between
the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground.
You use non-isolated analog modules if there are few or no potential differences between the
measuring sensors and chassis ground.
Isolated analog input modules

With the isolated analog input modules there is no electrical connection between the reference
point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground.
You use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference UISO can occur between
the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. By means of an
equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and chassis ground, make sure
that UISO does not exceed the permitted value.
Limited potential difference UCM

Only a limited potential difference UCM (common mode voltage) may occur amongst the M-
measuring lines of the input channels and between the leads and the reference point of the
measuring circuit MANA. In order to prevent the permissible value from being exceeded, you must
take different actions, described below, depending on the potential connection of the sensors.
Connecting electrically isolated sensors

The isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (chassis ground). They
can be floating.
With isolated sensors, potential differences might arise between the different sensors. These
potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the local distribution of the
sensors.

Analog modules
To ensure that the permissible value for UCM is not exceeded during use in heavily EMC-
affected environments, connect M- to MANA in modules with an MANA connection.
M+
M-
1 M+
M-
3 MANA
UISO
2
Figure 5-5 Connecting isolated sensors to an electrically isolated AI
(1) Electrically isolated sensors
(2) Chassis ground
(3) Connection required for modules with MANA
M +: Measuring line (positive)
M -: Measuring line (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
UISO: Potential difference between MANA and chassis ground
Note
Do not connect M- to MANA when connecting 2-wire transducers for current measurement and
when connecting resistance-type sensors. This also applies to inputs which are programmed
accordingly, but remain unused.
Non-isolated sensors
The isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (chassis ground). When
using non-isolated sensors, you must connect MANA to chassis ground.

Analog modules
Connecting non-isolated sensors

Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can
occur between the locally distributed measuring points. If the permitted value for UCM is
exceeded, there must be equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points.
M+
M-
M+
1
M-
UCM
MANA
3 UISO
2
Figure 5-6 Connecting non-isolated sensors to an isolated AI
(1) Non-isolated sensors
(2) Chassis ground
(3) Equipotential bonding conductor
Note
Do not use non-isolated 2-wire transducers and non-isolated resistance-type sensors!

Analog modules
5.10 Connecting voltage sensors
5.10 Connecting voltage sensors
Connecting voltage sensors
Note
The cables required to connect the analog input module and the sensors are not drawn in the
figures shown below.
In other words, you must continue to read and follow the instructions in the section "Connecting
sensors to analog inputs", which contains general information on connecting sensors.
+ M+
U M-
- M+
+
M-
U
-
MANA*
Figure 5-7 Connecting voltage sensors to an AI

(1) Connection required for modules with Mana

Analog modules
5.11 Connecting current sensors
Sensor supply voltage
Note
The 2-wire sensor is wired to a short-circuit-proof supply voltage at the terminals of the
analog input module. This 2-wire transducer then converts the measured variable into a
current.
Because the 2-wire transducer is supplied by the module, you must not ground the M- cables.
4-wire transducers require a separate supply voltage UH (auxiliary supply).
Connecting 2-wire transducers
2 3
+24 V
1
L+
+ M+
P - M-
M+
P +
- M-
MANA
M M
Figure 5-8 Connecting 2-wire transducers to an isolated AI

L +: Power supply connection 24 VDC
(1) Sensor, for example, pressure gauge
(2) + (3) 2-wire transducer

Analog modules
SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit: Connecting 2-wire transducers

Because the supply voltage for the 2-wire transducers is not fed by the SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit, you
must supply the sensors separately with 24 V.
2 3 +24 V
1
MV+
+ MI+
P - MI+
M-
+
P MV+
-
MI+
MI+
M-
M MANA
Figure 5-9 Connecting 2-wire transducers to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit

MI+: Measuring current (positive)
MV+: Measuring voltage (positive)
(2)+(3) 2-wire transducer
Connecting 4-wire transducers
2
1
M+
P +
- M-
M+
P + M-
-
UH
MANA
3
Figure 5-10 Connecting 4-wire transducers to an AI

Analog modules

UH: Auxiliary voltage
(2) 4-wire transducer
SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit: Connecting 4-wire transducers

To ensure that the permissible value for UCM is not exceeded, you must connect the M-cables to
MANA.
2
1
MV+
MI+
P + MI+
- M-
MV+
P +
- MI+
MI+
M-
UH
Figure 5-11 Connecting 4-wire transducers to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit

MI+: Measuring current (positive)
MV+: Measuring voltage (positive)
(2) 4-wire transducer

Analog modules
5.12 Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors
Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors
Note
Resistance thermometers/resistors are wired in 2-, 3- or 4-wire technique.

With 4-conductor and 3-conductor connections, the module supplies a constant current
via terminals IC + and IC - so that the potential drop occurring on the measuring cables is
compensated. It is imperative to wire the constant current cables directly to the resistance
thermometer/resistor.
Compensated measurements with 3- or 4-wire elements return a more precise result
compared to 2-wire measurements.
4-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer

The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer is measured via the M+ and M- terminals.
When you connect, watch out for the polarity of the connected cable (connect IC + and M+ as well
as IC- and M- to the resistance thermometer).
Make sure that the connected cables IC + and M+ andSO and SE+ and cables IC - and M- and
AGND and SE- are connected directly on the resistance thermometer.
M+ SE+
M- SE-
IC+ SO
IC- AGND
IC
Figure 5-12 4-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an AI

IC+ Constant current line (positive)
IC- Constant current line (negative)
M+ Measuring line (positive)
M- Measuring line (negative)

With a 3-conductor connection to modules with 4 terminals per resistance thermometer, you
must set up a jumper between M- and IC- and SE- and AGND (see Figure).

Analog modules
The module compensates in this circuit for the effect of the line resistance between the
module and the resistance thermometer/resistor.
Make sure that the connected cables IC + and M+ and SO and SE+ are directly connected to
the resistance thermometer.
To get an accurate measurement, make sure that the connected cables M+, IC + and IC- and
SE+, SO and AGND are the same length and have the same cross-section.
M+ SE+
M- SE-
IC+ SO
IC- AGND
IC
Figure 5-13 3-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an electrically isolated analog

input

For 2-conductor connections, bridge the M+ and IC+, and the M- and IC- terminals of the module.
Note: Cable resistance is also measured.
M+
M-
IC+
IC-
Figure 5-14 2-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer to an electrically isolated analog

input

Analog modules
5.13 Connecting thermocouples
Thermocouple design
Thermocouples consist of a pair of thermal probes, and all necessary installation and connecting
parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or metal alloys soldered or
welded together at the ends.
There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the material
used, for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all thermocouples is
the same, irrespective of their type.
1 2
3
°C
(1) Measuring junction

(2) Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs
(3) Connecting point
(4) Compensating leads
(5) Reference junction
(6) Leads
(7) Measurement input
Figure 5-15 Thermocouple design
Operating principle of thermocouples

If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free ends of the
thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo e.m.f., occurs at the free ends. The
magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the difference between the temperature
at the measuring junction and the temperature at the free ends, as well as on the material
combination used for the thermocouple.
Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends must be kept
at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine the temperature of the
measuring junction.

Analog modules
The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference junction
by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires are made of the same materials
as the thermocouple wires. The supply lines are made of copper.
Note
Make sure that the polarity is correct, otherwise significant measuring errors will occur.
Compensation of the reference junction temperature

There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference junction
temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the difference in
temperature between the reference junction and measuring point.
You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the reference
junction to be.
The last column of the following table lists the feature you must set for the "Reference
Junction" parameter in STEP 7. The reference temperature value is a separate parameter in
STEP 7.
Options for compensation of the reference junction temperature
Option Explanations Reference junc‐

tion
No compensation When you want to acquire only the difference in temperature None
between the measuring point and the reference junction
Internal compensation If you employ internal compensation, the internal tempera‐ Internal
ture of the module is used for comparison purposes.
External compensation with a compensat‐ You have already acquired and compensated the reference None
ing box in leads of an individual thermo‐ junction temperature using a compensating box, which you
couple have looped into an individual thermocouple.
Further processing at the module is not required.
External compensation with a resistance You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a RTD on Channel 0
thermometer to obtain the reference junc‐ resistance thermometer (pt 100) and have it calculated by
tion temperature (recommended meth‐ the module for any thermocouple.
od)
External compensation with a resistance Use a resistance thermometer on a module that measures RTD on Channel 0
thermometer when thermocouples with the reference junction temperature. Read in the climatic
the same reference junction are divided temperature value to the CPU and transfer the value to the
amongst several modules other modules using SFC55.
Constant reference junction temperature If the reference junction temperature is constant and Reference tempera‐
(thermometer, ice bath) known, you can specify this value in parameter assignment ture value
in STEP 7.
Principle of operation of internal compensation

Internal compensation allows you to form the reference point at the terminals of the analog
input module. In this case, route the compensating lines directly to the analog module. The
internal temperature sensor measures the module's temperature and returns a compensation
voltage.

Analog modules
Note: internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation.
Principle of operation of external compensation with compensating box

If you employ external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction of the
thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box, for example.
The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference junction
temperature. The reference junction is formed by the connecting ends of the thermocouple's
compensating lines.
The resistance of the temperature-sensitive bridge changes as a function of the difference
between the actual reference temperature and calibrating temperature. This difference
induces a positive or negative compensating voltage, which is added to the thermal voltage.
Note
The diagrams below do not show the connecting lines required for connecting the electrical
potentials of the analog input module and the sensors. This means that you must still read and
follow the instructions in the generally applicable information on connecting sensors.
Connection of thermocouples without compensation or using the reference temperature value

Wire the thermocouples either directly to the inputs of the module, or indirectly via
compensating lines. Each channel can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog
module independently of the other channels.
M+
M-
M+
M-

(1) Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple)
Figure 5-16 Connection of thermocouples without compensation or using the reference temperature
value to an isolated AI

Analog modules
Connecting the compensating box

The compensating box is looped in through the leads of each thermocouple. The compensating
box must be supplied on an isolated basis. The power supply module must provide adequate
noise filtering, for example, by means of grounded cable shielding.
Each channel can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog module independently
of the other channels. Each channel requires its own compensating box.
Note
Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0° C for analog input
modules.
Connecting thermocouples using resistance thermometers

Connect the resistance thermometer to channel 0 of the module. Make sure that you configure
the "RTD on Channel 0" reference junction in STEP 7 for each channel that has a thermocouple
connected to it.
If all thermocouples connected to the module's inputs share a common reference junction,
compensate the circuit as follows:

Analog modules
M+
M-
I C+
1
I C-
M+
M-
M+
M-
4 3
IC+: Constant current line (negative)
IC+: Constant current line (negative)
(1) Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple)
(2) RTD on Channel 0
(3) Incoming line (Cu)
(4) Reference junction
Figure 5-17 Connection of thermocouples of the same type with external compensation by means of
a resistance thermometer, connected to channel 0

Analog modules
5.14 Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs
5.14 Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs
Introduction
The analog output modules can be used to supply power to loads and actuators.
This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection
options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow.
Cables for analog signals

Always use shielded twisted-pair cables to wire analog signals. Form two twisted pairs of the QV
and S+, and M and S- signals. This reduces interference. Connect both ends of the analog cable
shield to ground.
If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current,
which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog signals. To avoid this
situation, you should ground the shield only at one end of the cable.
Isolated analog output modules

With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between the reference
point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground.
You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference UISO can occur between
the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and chassis ground. By means of an
equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and chassis ground, make sure
that UISO does not exceed the permitted value.

Analog modules
5.15 Connecting loads/actuators to voltage outputs
Connecting loads to a voltage output

Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a 4-conductor and a 2-conductor
connection.
Note
The cables required to connect the analog output module are not drawn in the figures shown
below.
loads/actuators to analog outputs", which contains general information on connecting sensors.
4-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output

You can use the 4-wire technique to achieve a high accuracy at the load by wiring the S- and S+
sensor lines directly to the load. This results in direct measurement and correction of the voltage
at the load.
Faults or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the sensor lead S-
and the reference circuit of the analog circuit MANA. This potential difference (UCM) must not
exceed the permissible value. A negative influence on the accuracy of the analog signal is
otherwise inevitable.
L+ +24 V
QV
S+ RL
S-
MANA
UISO
M
0V
1
Figure 5-18 4-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output of an electrically isolated analog
output module
L +: Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
QV: Analog output voltage
S +: Sensing line (positive)
S -: Sensing line (negative)
MANA: Reference potential of the analog circuit

Analog modules
M: Ground
(1) Chassis ground
2-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output

In the case of a 2-conductor connection, connect QV with S+ and MANA with S on the front
connector. However, this will not provide the accuracy of a 4-conductor connection.
Wire the loads to the QV terminals and to the reference point of measuring circuit MANA.
L+ +24 V
QV
S+ RL
S-
MANA
UISO
M
0V
1
Figure 5-19 2-conductor connection of loads to a voltage output of an electrically isolated analog
output module
S +: Sensing line (positive)
S -: Sensing line (negative)
M: Ground
(1) Chassis ground
See also
Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs (Page 197)

Analog modules
5.16 Connecting loads/actuators to current outputs
5.16 Connecting loads/actuators to current outputs
Connecting loads to current outputs

Always connect loads to QI and to the reference point of analog circuit MANA of a current output.
Note
The cables required to connect the analog output module are not drawn in the figure shown
below.
loads/actuators to analog outputs", which contains general information on connecting sensors.
+24 V
L+
QI
RL
MANA
UISO
M
0V
1
Figure 5-20 Connecting loads to a current output of an isolated AO
QI: Analog output current
M: Ground
(1) Chassis ground
See also
Connecting loads/actuators to analog outputs (Page 197)

Analog modules
5.17 Diagnostics functions of analog modules
Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages

We distinguish between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages.
You only obtain programmable diagnostic messages if you have enabled the diagnostics
using the relevant parameters. You perform parameter assignment in the "Diagnostics" tab in
STEP 7.
The analog module always provides non-programmable diagnostic messages, irrespective of
the enable state of diagnostics functions.
Reactions to diagnostic messages in STEP 7

Actions initiated by diagnostic messages:
• The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnostics of the analog module, forwarded to the
CPU and can be read out by the user program.
• The error LED on the analog module is lit.
• If you have set "Enable Diagnostic Interrupt" in STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and
OB 82 is called.
Reading diagnostic messages

You can read detailed diagnostic messages using SFCs in the user program (refer to the appendix
"Diagnostic data of signal modules").
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7 in the module diagnostics (refer to the online
help for STEP 7).
Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules

All analog input modules return the measured value 7FFFH as a reaction to errors, irrespective of
parameter settings. This measured value indicates either overflow, error, or a disabled channel.
Diagnostics using the INTF and EXTF LEDs

Some analog input modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF (internal fault)
and EXTF (external fault). The LEDs go out when all the internal and external faults have been
eliminated.
Refer to the specifications of the modules to find out which analog input modules have these
fault LEDs.
Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules

The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input modules with
diagnostics capability.

Analog modules
You can find out which diagnostic messages are possible with which modules in the
Appendix entitled "Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules".
Table 5-43 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules
Diagnostic message LED Scope of diagnostics Programmable

Module error INTF/EXTF Module No
Internal error INTF Module No
External error EXTF Module No
Channel error INTF/EXTF Module No
External auxiliary voltage missing EXTF Module No
Front connector missing EXTF Module No
No module parameters INTF Module No
Incorrect parameters INTF Module No
Channel information available INTF/EXTF Module No
Measuring range module incorrect/missing INTF Module No
Thermocouple connection error EXTF Module No
STOP mode - Module No
EPROM error INTF Module No
RAM error INTF Module No
ADC/DAC error INTF Module No
Hardware interrupt lost INTF Module No
Configuration / programming error INTF Channel No
Short-circuit to M EXTF Channel Yes
Wire break EXTF Channel Yes
Reference channel error EXTF Channel Yes
Underflow EXTF Channel Yes
Overflow EXTF Channel Yes
User connection not wired EXTF Channel No
Open conductor in + direction EXTF Channel No
Open conductor in - direction EXTF Channel No
Run time calibration error EXTF Channel No
Underrange or overrange EXTF Channel No
Open conductor in the current source EXTF Channel No
User calibration does not correspond to the parame‐ EXTF Channel No
ter assignment
Note
A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that
you must have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly in STEP 7.

Analog modules
Causes of errors and remedies for analog input modules
Table 5-44 Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules, causes of errors and remedies

Module error Any, the module has detected an error. -
Internal error Module has detected an error within the au‐ -
tomation system.
External error Module has detected an error outside of the -
automation system.
Channel error Indicates that only certain channels are faul‐ -
ty
External auxiliary voltage Load voltage to supply the 2-wire transduc‐ Connect supply L+
missing er is missing on terminals L+ and M.
Front connector missing Jumper between connections 1 and 2 in the Install jumper
front connector is missing.
No module parameters Module requires information whether it Message present after power on, until the CPU has
should operate with default system param‐ completed the transfer of parameters; configure
eters or with your parameters. the module as required.
Incorrect parameters A parameter or combination of parameters Reassign parameters to the module
is incorrect; impermissible measurement
range, for example.
Channel information availa‐ Channel error; module can provide addition‐ -
ble al channel information.
Measuring range module One or more measuring range modules is Insert the measuring range modules on the mod‐
incorrect/missing missing or incorrectly inserted ule according to the parameter assignment of the
type of measurement and the measurement range
STOP mode No parameters have been assigned to the If a reboot of the CPU all the digitized analog val‐
module and the first module cycle has not ues are in the intermediate memory, this message
been completed. is reset
EPROM error Module is defective Replace the module
RAM error
ADC/DAC error
Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an interrupt, since Change the interrupt handling in the CPU (change
the previous interrupt was not acknowl‐ priority for interrupt OB; shorten interrupt pro‐
edged; possible configuration error. gram).
Configuration / program‐ Illegal parameters transferred to module Check the measuring range module
ming error Reassign parameters to the module
Short-circuit to M A short-circuit to the M potential has occur‐ Eliminate the short-circuit.
red on the sensor supply of 2-wire transduc‐
ers.
Wire break Resistance of transducer circuit too high Use a different type of transducer, or modify the
wiring, for example, using a larger conductor
cross-section.
Open circuit between module and sensor Connect the cable
Channel not connected (open) Disable channel ("Measuring type" parameter)
Wire the channel

Analog modules

Reference channel error The reference junction connected at chan‐ Check the connections
nel 0 is faulty due to a wire break, for exam‐
ple.
The reference temperature value transfer‐ Reassign the parameters for the reference temper‐
red is not within the value range. ature
Underflow Input value below undershoot range; possi‐ Set another measuring range
ble cause of error: wrong measuring range
selected
With the measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA and Check the connections
1 to 5 V, if necessary by polarity reversal of
sensor connection
Overflow Input value exceeds overshoot range Set another measuring range
Run time calibration error A wiring fault has occurred on a channel Eliminate the wiring fault (fault remains until the
during the calibration cycle next calibration; in other words, a maximum 6 mi‐
nutes or until there is a STOP-RUN transition of the
CPU).

Analog modules
5.18 Interrupts of analog modules
Introduction
This section describes the interrupt reaction of analog modules. There are two types of interrupt:
• Diagnostic interrupt
• Hardware interrupt
Note: certain analog modules do not support interrupts, or can only partially "handle" the
interrupts described below. For information on modules supporting interrupt functions, refer
to their specifications.
For detailed information on the OBs and SFCs mentioned below, refer to the STEP 7 Online
Help.
Enabling interrupts
The interrupts are not preset - in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter
assignment. Interrupts are enabled in STEP 7.
Special feature: The module is inserted in ER-1/ER-2
Note
If you use the analog module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set the parameters for the input of all the
interrupts to "No" because the interrupt lines are not available in ER-1/ER-2.
When diagnostic interrupts are enabled, incoming error events (initial occurrence) and outgoing
error events (error is cleared) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts user program execution, and executes diagnostic interrupt OB82.
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed
diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is
exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
Hardware interrupt with trigger "high and low limit exceeded"

Define a working range by setting a high and low limit. If the process signal (for example, the
temperature) leaves this working range, the module triggers a hardware interrupt, provided the
interrupt is enabled.
As a result, the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and executes hardware
interrupt OB 40.
In the user program of OB 40, you can set how the programmable controller is required to
react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached.

Analog modules
When OB 40 is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module.
Note
Note: the system does not generate a hardware interrupt if your limit setting exceeds the
overshoot or undershoot range.
Structure of the start information tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40

The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start information of OB 40
in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The figure below shows the assignment of bits in DWORD 8 of
local data.
LB 8 LB 9 LB 11
.1 .0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 17 16 1 0 Bit-Nr.
1 1 1 1 LD 8
1 2 3 4
Figure 5-21 Start Information of OB 40: Which event has violated limits and triggered a hardware
interrupt
(1) Value exceeds high limit in channel 1
(2) Value exceeds high limit in channel 0
(3) Value exceeds low limit in channel 1
(4) Value exceeds low limit in channel 0
(5) Bit No.
Hardware interrupt triggered by "Reached end of scan cycle"

A hardware interrupt programmed to be triggered at the end of scan cycles allows you to
synchronize a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module.
A scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all active channels of the
analog input module. The module processes the channels in succession. When all measured
values are successfully converted, the module reports the existence of new measurement
data at its channels to the CPU by means of an interrupt.
You can always use this interrupt to load the actual, converted analog values.
See also
Features (Page 207)

Analog modules
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)
5.19 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit

(6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0)
5.19.1 Features
Overview
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit has the following features:
• 8 inputs for voltage/current measurement
• 4 inputs for resistance measurement
• Various measuring ranges, adjustable in parallel
• Resolution 13 bits
• Analog section isolated from the CPU
• Maximum permitted common mode voltage between the channels or between the
reference potentials of the connected sensors and MANA 30 V AC

Analog modules
Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit
MV0+
MI0+
MI0+
Suppressor circuit, current jumpering

M0-
D
CH0
Bus S7-400
Bus control
CH1 CH1
CH7 CH7
Front connectors
F_CON monitoring
+5V
+5V
M ANA Bus S7-400
0V 0V
Bus S7-400
-5V
Figure 5-22 Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit
WARNING
The module can get damaged.
The shunt of an input channel can be destroyed if you inadvertently connect a voltage sensor
to the M- /MI+ terminals of a channel.
Make sure that the front connector is wired in accordance with the following connection
diagram.

Analog modules
Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit
Voltage Current measurement Resistance

measurement measurement
1
2
3
4
5
6 MV0+ MV0+ M0+
7 MI0+
V CH0 Word 0 CH0
8 MI0+
9 M0- M0- M0-
10 CH0 Word 0
11 MV1+ MV1+ IC0+
12 MI1+
CH1 Word 2 CH1
13 MI1+
14 A M1- M1- IC0-
15
16 MV2+ MV2+ M1+
17 MI2+
CH2 Word 4 CH2
18 MI2+
19 M2- M2- M1-
20 CH2 Word 4
21 MV3 + MV3 + IC1+
22 MI3 +
CH3 Word 6 CH3
23 MI3 +
24 M3- M3- IC1-
25 MANA
26 M ANA
27
28 MV4+ MV4+ M2+
29 MI4+
V CH4 Word 8 CH4
30 MI4+
31 M4- M4- M2-
32 CH4 Word 8
33 MV5+ MV5+ IC2+
34 MI5+
CH5 Word 10 CH5
35 MI5+
A
36 M5- M5- IC2-
37
38 MV6+ MV6+ M3 +
39 MI6+
CH6 Word 12 CH6
40 MI6+
41 M6- M6- M3-
42
CH6 Word 12
43 MV7+ MV7+ IC3 +
44 MI7+
45 CH7 Word 14 MI7+ CH7
46 M7- M7- IC3-
47
48
Figure 5-23 Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit

Analog modules
Technical specifications for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit
Article number 6ES7431-1KF00-0AB0

Supply voltage
Load voltage L+
• Rated value (DC) not necessary
Input current
Power loss
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 8
• For voltage/current measurement 8
• For resistance measurement 4
permissible input voltage for voltage input (de‐ 50 V
struction limit), max.
permissible input current for current input (de‐ 50 mA; 40 mA continuous
Constant measurement current for resistance- 1.67 mA
type transmitter, typ.
Input ranges
• Voltage Yes
• Current Yes
• Thermocouple No
• Resistance thermometer No
• Resistance Yes
Input ranges (rated values), voltages
• 1 V to 5 V Yes
– Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) 200 kΩ
• -1 V to +1 V Yes
– Input resistance (-1 V to +1 V) 200 kΩ
• -10 V to +10 V Yes
Input ranges (rated values), currents
• -20 mA to +20 mA Yes
– Input resistance (-20 mA to +20 mA) 80 Ω
• 4 mA to 20 mA Yes
– Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 80 Ω
Input ranges (rated values), resistors
• 0 to 600 ohms Yes
– Input resistance (0 to 600 ohms) usable up to 500 ohms
Cable length
• shielded, max. 200 m
Analog value generation for the inputs

Analog modules

Measurement principle integrating
Integration and conversion time/resolution per
channel
• Resolution with overrange (bit including 13 bit
sign), max.
• Integration time, parameterizable Yes
• Basic conversion time (ms) 23 / 25 ms
• Integration time (ms) 16,7 / 20 ms
• Interference voltage suppression for interfer‐ 50 / 60 Hz
ence frequency f1 in Hz
• Basic execution time of the module (all chan‐ 200 ms; 184 / 200 ms
nels released)
Smoothing of measured values
• parameterizable No
Encoder
Connection of signal encoders
• for voltage measurement Yes; possible
• for current measurement as 2-wire transduc‐ Yes; with external transmitter supply
er
• for current measurement as 4-wire transduc‐ Yes
er
• for resistance measurement with two-wire Yes; Line resistances are also measured
connection
• for resistance measurement with three-wire Yes; Line resistances are also measured
connection
• for resistance measurement with four-wire Yes
connection
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.05 %
Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.02 %/K; ±0.02 %/K in impedance measuring
range; ±0.007 % in all other measuring ranges
Crosstalk between the inputs, min. 50 dB
Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 °C (relative 0.1 %
to input range), (+/-)
Operational error limit in overall temperature
range
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 1 %; ±1.0 % at ±1 V; ±0.6 % at ±10 V; ±0.7 % at 1 to
5V
• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 1 %; at ±20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
• Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 1.25 %; 0 to 500 ohms (4-conductor measurement,
in range of 600 ohms)
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.7 %; 0.7% at ±1 V; 0.4% at ±10 V; 0.5% at 1 to 5
V
• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.7 %; at ±20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

Analog modules

• Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.8 %; 0 to 500 ohms (4-conductor measurement,
in range of 600 ohms)
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1
+/- 1 %), f1 = interference frequency
• Series mode interference (peak value of in‐ 40 dB
terference < rated value of input range), min.
• Common mode interference, min. 100 dB; UCM > 30 V
Alarms No
Potential separation analog inputs
• Potential separation analog inputs Yes; internal/external
between the inputs (UCM) 30 V AC
Between the inputs and MANA (UCM) 30 V AC
between MANA and M internally (UISO) 60 V DC/30 V AC
Isolation
Isolation tested with 2 120 V DC between bus and analog part; 500 V DC
between bus and local ground; 2 120 V DC between
analog part and local ground
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Analog modules
5.19.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit
Setting the operating mode

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x13 Bit in STEP 7.
Parameters
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules
The table below provides an overview of configurable parameters, including defaults.
Table 5-45 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit
Parameters Value range De‐ Parame‐ Scope

fault1 ter type
Measurement
• Measuring Disabled U
method
U Voltage Static Channel
R-4L Resistance (4-conductor connec‐
tion)
• Measuring Refer to respective section for the measuring ± 10 V
range ranges of the input channels that you can set.
• Interference 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz
frequency sup‐
pression
1
See also

Analog modules
5.19.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit
Measuring methods
You can set the measuring method at the input channels:
• Voltage measurement
• Current measurement
You perform the setting with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7.
Circuit for resistance measurement

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance with the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit:
Table 5-46 Channels for resistance measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit
Measuring type parameter Permissible Condition

for channel n
Resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels n+1 (1, 3, 5,
(4-conductor connection) 7).
Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the resistance
that is connected to channel n.
Unused channels
Unused channels can be left open. You can improve the noise immunity of the module in a
measuring environment with serious interference by short-circuiting the channels and
connecting to MANA. For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to
"deactivated". This reduces the module's cycle time.
Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges at the "measuring range" parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-47 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit
Selected measuring method Measuring range Description

V: Voltage ±1 V The digitized analog values are listed in the section "Repre‐
1 V to 5 V sentation of analog values for output channels" in the voltage
±10 V measuring range.
2DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA The digitized analog values are listed in the section "Repre‐
(2-wire transducer) sentation of analog values for output channels in the current
measuring range".

Analog modules

4DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA The digitized analog values are listed in the section "Repre‐
(4-wire transducer) ± 20 mA sentation of analog values for output channels in the current
measuring range".
R-4L: Resistance 600 Ω The digitized analog values are listed in the section "Repre‐
(4-conductor connection) sentation of analog values for output channels in the resist‐
ance-type sensor range".
Default
The "voltage" measuring method and "± 10 V" measuring range are set by default at the module.
You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without configuring
the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit in STEP 7.

(6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)
5.20.1 Features
Overview
• 8 inputs for current and voltage measurement
• 4 inputs for resistance and temperature measurement
• Particularly suited to temperature measurement
• Temperature sensor types configurable
• Linearization of sensor characteristic curves
• Supply voltage: 24 V DC only required for connection of 2-wire transducers
• Maximum permitted common mode voltage between channels or between channel and
central grounding point 120 V AC
Note
"Wire break" diagnostics
The diagnosis "wire break" can be configured for "voltage" measurement for this module, but
is not evaluated by the module in that measurement type.

Analog modules
CH0 Measuring
range
CH1 module 0
Bus S7-400
Bus control
A
MULTIPLEXER
OPTO RELAY
CH6 Measuring
range
CH7 module 3
+ 5V ENABLE
+ 15V 24 V Bus S7-400
L+
M 0V 0V Bus S7-400
- 15V

Analog modules
Thermocouples Resistance measurement

Voltage measurement- Resistance thermometer
Current measurement
1
2
3
L+ L+
4
5
6 M0+ CH0 Word 0 M0+
7 M0- M0-
8
9 CH0 Word 0
10
11 M1+ CH1 Word 2 IC0+
V
12 M1- IC0-
13
14
15
16 M2+ CH2 Word 4 M1+
17 M2- M1-
18
19 CH2 Word 4
20
21 M3 + CH3 Word 6 IC1+
22 M3- IC1-
23
24
25
26
27
28 M4+ CH4 Word 8 M2+
V
29 M4- M2-
30
31 CH4 Word 8
32
33 M5+ CH5 Word 10 IC2+
V
34 M5- IC2-
35
36
37
38 M6+ Word 12 M3 +
Tr CH6
39 M6- M3-
40
41 CH6 Word 12
42
43 M7+ CH7 IC3 +
Tr Word 14
44 M7- IC3-
45
46
47
M M M
48

Analog modules

Supply voltage
Load voltage L+
• Rated value (DC) 24 V; Only required for supplying 2-wire transmit‐
ters
Input current
from load voltage L+ (without load), max. 200 mA; for 8 connected, fully controlled 2-wire
transmitters
supply voltage of the transmitters / header
• short-circuit proof Yes
• Supply current, max. 50 mA
Power loss
Analog inputs
permissible input voltage for voltage input (de‐ 18 V; 18 V continuous, 75 V for 1 ms (mark to space
struction limit), max. ratio 1:20)
permissible input current for current input (de‐ 40 mA; Permanent
Input ranges
• Voltage Yes
• Current Yes
• Thermocouple Yes
• Resistance thermometer Yes
• Resistance Yes
• 1 V to 5 V Yes
– Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) 1 MΩ
• -1 V to +1 V Yes
– Input resistance (-1 V to +1 V) 1 MΩ
• -10 V to +10 V Yes
• -2.5 V to +2.5 V Yes
– Input resistance (-2.5 V to +2.5 V) 1 MΩ
• -250 mV to +250 mV Yes
– Input resistance (-250 mV to +250 mV) 1 MΩ

Analog modules

• -5 V to +5 V Yes
• -500 mV to +500 mV Yes
• -80 mV to +80 mV Yes
• 0 to 20 mA Yes
– Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 50 Ω
Input ranges (rated values), thermocouples
• Type B Yes
– Input resistance (Type B) 1 MΩ
• Type E Yes
– Input resistance (Type E) 1 MΩ
• Type J Yes
– Input resistance (type J) 1 MΩ
• Type K Yes
– Input resistance (Type K) 1 MΩ
• Type L Yes
– Input resistance (Type L) 1 MΩ
• Type N Yes
– Input resistance (Type N) 1 MΩ
• Type R Yes
– Input resistance (Type R) 1 MΩ
• Type S Yes
– Input resistance (Type S) 1 MΩ
• Type T Yes
– Input resistance (Type T) 1 MΩ
• Type U Yes
– Input resistance (Type U) 1 MΩ
Input ranges (rated values), resistance ther‐
mometer
• Ni 100 Yes
– Input resistance (Ni 100) 1 MΩ
• Ni 1000 Yes
• Pt 100 Yes
– Input resistance (Pt 100) 1 MΩ
• Pt 1000 Yes
• Pt 10000 Yes

Analog modules

• Pt 200 Yes
• Pt 500 Yes
– Input resistance (0 to 48 ohms) 1 MΩ
• 0 to 6000 ohms Yes; Usable up to 5000 Ohm
Thermocouple (TC)
Temperature compensation
– internal temperature compensation No
– external temperature compensation with Yes
Pt100
compensations socket
– dynamic reference temperature value Yes
Characteristic linearization
• parameterizable Yes
– for thermocouples Type B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U
– for resistance thermometer Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000
Cable length
• shielded, max. 200 m; 50 m with thermocouples and input ranges
≤ 80 mV
channel
• Resolution with overrange (bit including 14 bit; with activated filtering: 16 bit
sign), max.
• Basic conversion time (ms) 20.1 / 23.5 ms
• Integration time (ms) 16,7 / 20 ms
• Basic conversion time, including integration
time (ms)

Analog modules

– additional conversion time for wire-break 4,3 ms
monitoring
– additional conversion time for resistance 40.2 / 47 ms
measurement
monitoring and resistance measurement
• Basic execution time of the module (all chan‐ 161 ms; 161 / 188 ms
nels released)
• parameterizable Yes; in 4 stages
Encoder
er
– Burden of 2-wire transmitter, max. 750 Ω
er
connection
• for resistance measurement with three-wire Yes
connection
connection
Errors/accuracies
Temperature error (relative to input range), (+/-) 0.004 %/K
range
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.38 %; ±0.38 % at ±80 mV; ±0.35 % at ±250 mV,
±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2,5 V, ±5 V, 1 to 5 V, ±10 V
• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.35 %; ±20 mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
• Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.5 %
• Resistance thermometer, relative to input 0.5 %
range, (+/-)
• Thermocouple, relative to input range, (+/-) TC Type B (±14.8 K), TC Type R (±9.4 K), TC Type S
(±10.6 K), TC Type T (±2.2 K), TC Type E (±4.0 K), TC
Type J (±5.2 K), TC Type K (±7.6 K), TC Type U (±3.5
K), TC Type L (±5.1 K), TC Type N (±5.5 K)

Analog modules

• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.15 %; ±0.15 % (±250 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2.5 V,
±5 V, 1 to 5 V, ±10 V); ±0.17% (±80 mV)
• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.15 %; ±20 mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
• Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.15 %; ±0.15 % at 0 to 48 ohms (4-conductor
measurement), 0 to 150 ohms (4-conductor meas‐
urement), 0 to 300 ohms (4-conductor measure‐
ment), 0 to 600 ohms (4-conductor measure‐
ment, in range of 6000 ohms); ±0.3 % at 0 to 300
ohms (3-conductor measurement), 0 to 600 ohms
(3-conductor measurement), 0 to 5000 ohms (3-
conductor measurement, in range of 6000 ohms)
range, (+/-)
• Common mode interference, min. 100 dB; UCM < 120 VSS
Alarms No
• Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes
between the inputs (UCM) 60 V DC/30 V AC
Between the inputs and MANA (UCM) 60 V DC/30 V AC
Isolation
Isolation tested with 2 120 V DC between bus and L+/M; 2 120 V DC
between bus and analog section; 500 V DC be‐
tween bus and local ground; 500 V DC between
analog section and L+/M; 2 120 V DC between an‐
alog section and local ground; 2 120 V DC between
L+/M and local ground
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm

Analog modules

Depth 210 mm
Weights

Analog modules

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit by means of measuring range modules
on the module and in STEP 7.
Measuring range modules

A measuring range module of the module matches two channels and one resistance channel to
each type of sensor. Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method and
range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the respective section.
For an overview of the settings of specific measuring methods and ranges, refer to the
corresponding table in the section "Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431;
AI 8 x 14 Bit". The necessary settings are also shown on the label attached to the module.
Parameters
Parameters Value range Default set‐ Parame‐ Scope

ting1 ter type
Diagnostics
Measurement

Analog modules
Parameters Value range Default set‐ Parame‐ Scope

ting1 ter type
• Measuring method Deactiva‐ U Static Channel
ted Voltage
U
4DMU Current (4-wire
sensor)
sensor)
R-4L Resistance (4-
conductor con‐
nection)
R-3L Resistance (3-
conductor con‐
nection)
RTD-4L Thermal resistor
(linear, 4-con‐
ductor connec‐
tion)
RTD-3L Thermal resistor
(linear, 3-con‐
ductor connec‐
tion)
TC-L Thermocouple
(linear)
• Measuring range For information on configura‐ ± 10 V
ble measuring ranges of in‐
put channels, refer to the
chapter "Measuring methods
and measuring ranges of SM
431; AI 8 x 14 Bit".
• Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67 oC 0,00 oC Dynamic Module
• Interference frequency sup‐ 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz Static Channel
pression
• Smoothing None None Static Channel
Weak
Medium
Strong
RTD on Channel 0
Reference temperature value
dynamic
1
Measured value smoothing

You will find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in the
respective section.

Analog modules
The following figure shows for the module the number of module cycles, in the case of a step
response, after which the smoothed analog value is applied to almost 100%, depending on
the smoothing setting. The figure applies to every change of signal at an analog input.

percent
100
63
50
0 50 100 150 200

average:
high:
Figure 5-26 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit
See also
Conversion, cycle, settling and response time of analog modules (Page 175)
Measuring methods
• Temperature measurement
You specify the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the
"Measuring type" parameter in STEP 7.

Analog modules
Circuit variants for the channels

Two channels are set in each case with the measuring range module. There are therefore
restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5 and 6/7, as
shown in the following table:
Table 5-49 Selection of the measuring method for channel n and channel n+1 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit
(6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)
Measuring method, Measuring method, channel n + 1

channel n
Deacti‐ Voltage Current Current R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L
vated 4-DMU 2-DMU
Disabled x x x x x
Voltage x x x
Current 4-wire trans‐ x x
ducer
ducer
4-wire x
resistor
3-wire x
resistor
Four-wire thermal re‐ x
sistor
3-wire thermal x
resistor
Thermocouples x x x
Example
If you select "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 6, you can only disable the measuring
method or set "current (2-wire transducer)" for channel 7.

Analog modules

The following conditions apply when measuring the resistance and temperature with the SM
431; AI 8 x 14 Bit:
Table 5-50 Channels for resistance and temperature measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit

for channel n
Resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels n+1
(4-conductor connection) (1, 3, 5, 7).
Resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6 Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the re‐
(3-conductor connection) sistance that is connected to channel n.
Thermal resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6
(linear, 4-wire connection)
Thermal resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6
(linear, 3-wire connection)
Circuit for reference junction compensation for thermocouples

If you select "RTD on Channel 0" as a reference junction for reference junction compensation for
thermocouples, the following applies:
Table 5-51 Thermocouple with reference junction compensation via RTD on channel 0
Measuring type parameter Permissible for Condition

channel n
RTD on Channel 0 2 to 7 You must connect and configure on channel 0 a resistance thermom‐
eter with linearization, a 3 or 4-conductor connection in climatic
range. This means that channels 0 and 1 are assigned.
Reason: If channel 0 is to be used as the reference junction, a resist‐
ance-type sensor must be connected there to record absolute tem‐
peratures in the climatic range.
Unused channels
Unused channels can usually be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "A". In
measuring environments with strong interference, you can improve the module's immunity to
interference by short-circuiting the channels.
For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces
the module's cycle time.

Analog modules
Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges using the measuring range modules, and at the "measuring method"
parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-52 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)
Selected measuring method Measuring range Measuring range module Description

(type of sensor) settings
V: Voltage ± 80 mV A The digitized analog values are lis‐
± 250 mV ted in the section "Representation
± 500 mV of analog values for analog input
±1V channels" in the voltage measur‐
± 2.5 V ing range.
±5V
1 to 5 V
± 10 V
2DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers with
(2-wire transducer) current you must connect 24 V to
the L+ and M front connector ter‐
minals.
The digitized analog values are lis‐
ted in the section "Representation
of analog values for analog input
channels" in the current measur‐
ing range.
4DMU: Current 0 mA to 20 mA C The digitized analog values are lis‐
(4-wire transducer) 4 mA to 20 mA ted in the section "Representation
± 20 mA of analog values for analog input
channels" in the current measur‐
ing range.
R-4L: Resistance 48 Ω A The digitized analog values are lis‐
(4-conductor connection) 150 Ω ted in the section "Representation
300 Ω of analog values for analog input
600 Ω channels" in the resistance meas‐
6000 Ω uring range.
R-3L: Resistance 300 Ω
(3-conductor connection) 600 Ω
6000 Ω

Analog modules

TCL: Thermocouple (linear) Type B A The digitized analog values are lis‐
(temperature measurement) Type N ted in the section "Representation
Type E of analog values for analog input
Type R channels" in the temperature
Type S range.
Type J
Type L
Type T
Type K
Type U
RTD-4L: Thermal resistance Pt 100 Climatic A
(linear, 4-wire connection) Pt 200 Climatic
(temperature measurement) Pt 500 Climatic
RTD-3L: Thermal resistance Pt 1000 Climatic
(linear, 3-wire connection) Ni 100 Climatic
(temperature measurement) Ni 1000 Climatic
Pt 100 Standard
Pt 200 Standard
Pt 500 Standard
Pt 1000 Standard
Ni 100 Standard
Ni 1000 Standard
Defaults
The module has the following default settings in STEP 7:
• Channels 0 to 7: "Voltage" measuring method ; "± 10 V" measuring range
You can use these measuring methods and measuring ranges without configuring the SM
431; AI 8 x 14 Bit in STEP 7.

(6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)
5.21.1 Features
Overview
SM 431; AI 8 x 14 bit has the following features:
• Rapid A/D change, therefore highly suited to highly dynamic processes
• 8 inputs for voltage/current measurement
• 4 inputs for resistance measurement

Analog modules

• Supply voltage: 24 V DC only required for connection of 2-wire transducers
reference potentials of the connected sensors and MANA 8 V AC
CH0 Measuring
range
CH1 module 0
Bus S7-400
Bus control
MANA A
MULTIPLEXER
Measuring
CH6 range
module 3
CH7
+ 5V ENABLE
L+
+ 15V +5V Bus S7-400
M
0V 0V Bus S7-400
MANA
- 15V

Analog modules
Voltage measurement Resistance measurement

Current measurement
1
2
3
L+ L+
4
5
7 V M0- M0-
8
9 CH0 Word 0
10
V
12 M1- IC0-
13
14
15
16 M2+ CH2 Word 4 M1+
17 M2- M1-
18
19 CH2 Word 4
20
21 M3 + CH3 Word 6 IC1+
22 M3- IC1-
23
24
25
26 MANA
27
28 M4+ CH4 Word 8 M2+
A
29 M4- M2-
30
CH4 Word 8
31
32
33 M5+ CH5 Word 10 IC2+
A
34 M5- IC2-
35
36
37
38 M6+ M3 +
Tr CH6 Word 12
39 M6- M3-
40
41 CH6 Word 12
42
43 M7+ CH7 Word 14 IC3 +
Tr
44 M7- IC3-
45
46
47
M M
48

Analog modules

Supply voltage
Load voltage L+
ters
Input current
transmitters
from backplane bus 5 V DC, max. 1 000 mA
Power loss
Analog inputs
permissible input current for current input (de‐ 40 mA; Permanent
Input ranges
• Voltage Yes
• Current Yes
• Thermocouple No
• Resistance Yes
• 1 V to 5 V Yes
• -1 V to +1 V Yes
• -10 V to +10 V Yes

Analog modules

– Input resistance (4 mA to 20 mA) 50 kΩ
Cable length
Measurement principle Actual value encryption
channel
• Resolution with overrange (bit including 14 bit; 14 / 14 / 14
sign), max.
• Basic conversion time (ms) 52 µs
• Interference voltage suppression for interfer‐ none / 400 / 60 / 50 Hz
• Time constant of the input filter 15 µs
• Basic execution time of the module (all chan‐ 0.42 s
nels released)
• parameterizable Yes; None, strong
Encoder
er
er
connection
• for resistance measurement with three-wire Yes; Line resistances are also measured
connection
connection
Errors/accuracies
range
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.7 %; ±0.7 % at ±1 V; ±0.9 % at ±10 V, 1 to 5 V

Analog modules

• Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 1%
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.6 %; 0.6 % at ±1 V; 0.75 % at ±10 V, 1 to 5 V
• Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.7 %; 0 to 600 ohms
• Common mode interference, min. 80 dB
Alarms No
between the inputs (UCM) 8 V AC
Between the inputs and MANA (UCM) 8 V AC
Isolation
Isolation tested with 2 120 V DC between bus and analog section; 500 V
DC between bus and local ground; 500 V DC be‐
tween analog part and L+/M; 2 120 V DC between
analog part and local ground; 2 120 V DC between
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Analog modules
Introduction
You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit by means of measuring range modules
on the module and in STEP 7.

corresponding table in the section "Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431,
Parameters
Table 5-53 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF20-0AB0)

type
Measurement
• Measuring meth‐ Disabled Static Channel
od U Voltage
4DMU Current (4-wire U
sensor)
sensor)
R-4L Resistance (4-con‐
ductor connection)
• Measuring range Refer to the respective section for ± 10 V
the measuring ranges of the input
channels that you can set.
• Noise suppres‐ 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; none 50 Hz
sion
Strong
1

Analog modules

respective section. You can only set strong smoothing for the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit.
The module cycle time is a constant, irrespective of how many channels are enabled.
It therefore has no effect on the filter settling time, which is defined by the parameter
assignment of interference frequency suppression and smoothing.
Filter settling time with strong smoothing
Table 5-54 Interference frequency suppression and filter settling time with smoothing
Noise suppression Smoothing Filter settling time in ms

None Strong -
50 Hz Strong 100
60 Hz Strong 83,333
400 Hz Strong 12,5
Step response with strong smoothing

The following figure illustrates the contents of the table above. It shows the filter settling time
after which, in the case of a step response, the smoothed analog value is applied to almost
100%, depending on the interference frequency suppression that has been set. The figure
applies to every change of signal at an analog input.
Signal variation Step response for any analog input signal

in percent
100
63
50
0 12,5 30 60 83,333 100 120 150

Noise suppression Filter settling time in ms
400 Hz:
60 Hz:
50 Hz:
Figure 5-29 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0)

Analog modules
See also
Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (Page 239)

Analog modules
Measuring methods

restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5 and 6/7, as
shown in the following table:
(6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)
Measuring method, Measuring method, channel n + 1

channel n
Deacti‐ Voltage Current Current R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L
vated 4-DMU 2-DMU
Disabled x x x x x
Voltage x x x
ducer
ducer
4-conductor resistor x
4-conductor thermal x
resistor
3-conductor thermal x
resistor
Thermocouples x x x
Example

Analog modules

431; AI 8 x 14 Bit:
Table 5-56 Channels for resistance measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)

for channel n
Resistance 0, 2, 4 or 6 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels n+1
(4-conductor connection) (1, 3, 5, 7).
Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the re‐
sistance that is connected to channel n.
Unused channels
Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "B". You can
improve the noise immunity of the module in a measuring environment with serious
interference by interconnecting M- and MANA.
Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges using the measuring range modules, and at the "measuring method"
parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-57 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7431-1KF10-0AB0)
Selected measuring Measuring range Measuring range module Description

method (type of sensor) settings
V: Voltage ±1V A The digitized analog values are listed
1 to 5 V B in the section "Representation of an‐
± 10 V alog values for analog input chan‐
nels" in the voltage measuring range.
2DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers with cur‐
(2-wire transducer) rent you must connect 24 V to the L+
and M front connector terminals.
The digitized analog values are listed
in the section "Representation of an‐
alog values for analog input chan‐
nels" in the current measuring range.
4DMU: Current 4 to 20 mA C The digitized analog values are listed
(4-wire transducer) ± 20 mA in the section "Representation of an‐
nels" in the current measuring range.
R-4L: Resistance 600 Ω A The digitized analog values are listed
(4-conductor connection) in the section "Representation of an‐
nels" in the resistance measuring
range.

Analog modules
5.22 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit (6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)
Defaults
• Channels 0 to 7: "Voltage" measuring method ; "± 10 V" measuring range
You can use these measuring methods and measuring ranges without configuring the SM
431; AI 8 x 14 Bit in STEP 7.

(6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0)
5.22.1 Features
Overview
• 16 inputs for current/voltage measurement
• Non-isolated between analog section and bus
reference potentials of the connected sensors and central grounding point 2 V DC/AC

Analog modules
Measuring range module
Multiplexer
*
Control and backplane bus connection

*
Tr
Tr
Tr
Tr
* Tr = Transducer = Measuring
transducer
Tr
*Voltage/current sensor and ground
must be connected to building ground
Tr
of the rack
Tr
Tr
*

Analog modules
Voltage measurement
Current measurement
1
2
3 L+
L+
4
5
6 M0+ CH0 Word 0
7 M0-
8 M1+ CH1 Word 2
9 M1-
10
11 M2+ CH2 Word 4
12 M2-
13 M3+ CH3 Word 6
14 M3-
15
16 M4+ CH4 Word 8
Tr
17 M4-
18 M5+ CH5 Word 10
Tr
19 M5-
20
21 Tr M6+ CH6 Word 12
22 M6-
23 Tr M7+ CH7 Word 14
24 M7-
25
26
27
28 M8+ CH8 Word 16
29 M8-
30 M9+ CH9 Word 18
31 M9-
32
33 M10+ CH10 Word 20
34 M10-
35 M11+ CH11 Word 22
36 M11-
37
38 M12+ CH12 Word 24
Tr
39 M12-
40 M13+ CH13 Word 26
Tr
41 M13-
42
43 M14+ CH14 Word 28
Tr
44 M14-
45 Tr M15+ CH15 Word 30
46 M15-
47 M
M
48

Analog modules
Article number 6ES7431-0HH00-0AB0

Supply voltage
Load voltage L+
ters
Input current
transmitters
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 2W
Analog inputs
permissible input voltage for voltage input (de‐ 20 V; 20 V DC permanent, 75 V DC for max. 1 s (duty
struction limit), max. factor 1:20)
permissible input current for current input (de‐ 40 mA
Input ranges
• Voltage Yes
• Current Yes
• Thermocouple No
• Resistance No
• 1 V to 5 V Yes
– Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) 100 kΩ
• -1 V to +1 V Yes
• -10 V to +10 V Yes

Analog modules

Cable length
channel
sign), max.
• Basic conversion time (ms) 55 / 65 ms
• Integration time (ms) 50 / 60 ms
• Basic execution time of the module (all chan‐ 1 040 ms; 880 / 1 040 ms
nels released)
• parameterizable No
Encoder
• for current measurement as 2-wire transduc‐
er
er
Errors/accuracies
range
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.65 %; 1.0 % at 1 to 5 V; 0.65 % at ±1 V, ±10 V
• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.65 %
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.25 %; 0.5% at 1 to 5 V; 0.25% at ±1 V, ±10 V
• Common mode interference, min. 86 dB; UCM < 2 V

Analog modules

Alarms No
• Potential separation analog inputs No
• between the channels and backplane bus No
• Between the channels and load voltage L+ No
between the inputs (UCM) 2 V DC / 2 Vpp AC
Between the inputs and MANA (UCM) 2 V DC / 2 Vpp AC
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Analog modules
Introduction
You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit by means of measuring range
modules on the module and in STEP 7.

A measuring range module of the module matches two consecutive channels to each type of
sensor. Reposition the measuring range modules to suit the measuring method and range. The
steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in the respective section.
Parameters
Parameters Value range Default1 Parame‐ Scope

ter type
Measurement
• Measuring meth‐ Disabled U Static Channel
od U Voltage
sensor)
sensor)
• Measuring range For information on configurable ±10 V
measuring ranges of input chan‐
nels, refer to the chapter "Measur‐
ing methods and measuring rang‐
es of SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit".
• Noise suppres‐ 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz
sion
1
See also
Measuring methods and measuring ranges of SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (Page 263)
General information about diagnostic messages (Page 82)

Analog modules
Measuring methods

restrictions as regards the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5, 6/7, 8/9,
10/11, 12/13 and 14/15, as shown in the following table:
Measuring method, chan‐ Measuring method, channel n + 1

nel n Disabled Voltage Voltage 1 to Voltage Current 4- Current 2-
±1 V 5V ±10 V DMU DMU
Disabled x x x x x x
Voltage ±1 V x x
Voltage 1 to 5 V x x x
Voltage ±10 V x x x
Current 4-wire transducer x x
Example
Unused channels
Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "B". You can
interference by interconnecting M- and MANA.

Analog modules
Measuring ranges
You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the
Selected measuring meth‐ Measuring range Measuring range mod‐ Description

od (type of sensor) ule settings
V: Voltage ±1 V A The digitized analog values are listed in
1 to 5 V B the section "Representation of analog val‐
± 10 V ues for analog input channels" in the volt‐
age measuring range.
2DMU: Current (2-wire sen‐ 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers with current
sor) you must connect 24 V to the L+ and M
front connector terminals.
The digitized analog values are listed in
the section "Representation of analog val‐
ues for analog input channels" in the cur‐
rent measuring range.
4DMU: Current (4-wire sen‐ 4 to 20 mA C The digitized analog values are listed in
sor) ± 20 mA the section "Representation of analog val‐
ues for analog input channels" in the cur‐
rent measuring range.
Default
• Measuring method "voltage"
• Measuring range "± 10 V".
You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without
configuring the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit in STEP 7.
See also
Representation of analog values of analog input channels (Page 148)

Analog modules
5.23 Analog input module SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)

(6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)
5.23.1 Features
Overview
• 16 inputs for voltage measurement, current measurement and temperature measurement
with thermocouples (TC)
• 8 inputs for resistance and temperature measurement with resistance thermometers (RTD)
• Configurable limit alarm
• Configurable end-of-cycle interrupt

Analog modules
CH0 Meas. range I

module 0 const
CH1
D
Bus S7-400
Bus control
Signal
jumper-
ing PGA
A
Multiplexer
Opto relay
CH14 Meas. range

CH15 module 7
+ 15 V
L+ + 5V +5V
Diagnostics Bus S7-400
in 0V
M 0V
L+ loop -15 V

Analog modules
Thermocouples Resistance measurement

Voltage measurement Resistance thermometer
INTF Current measurement
1
EXTF 2
3
L+ L+
4
5
7 M0- M0- CH0 Word 0
9 M1- IC0-
10
11 M2+ CH2 Word 4 M1+
V
12 M2- M1- CH2 Word 4
13 M3 + CH3 Word 6 IC1+
V
14 M3- IC1-
15
16 M4+ CH4 Word 8 M2+
17 M4- M2- CH4 Word 8
18 M5+ CH5 Word 10 IC2+
19 M5- IC2-
20
21 M6+ CH6 Word 12 M3 +
22 M6- M3- CH6 Word 12
23 M7+ CH7 IC3 +
Word 14
24 M7- IC3-
25
26
27
28 M8+ CH8 Word 16 M4+
A
29 M8- M4- CH8 Word 16
30 A M9+ CH9 Word 18 IC4+
31 M9- IC4-
32
33 M10+ CH10 Word 20 M5+
A
34 M10- M5- CH10 Word 20
35 M11+ CH11 Word 22 IC5+
A
36 M11- IC5-
37
38 M12+ CH12 Word 24 M6+
Tr
39 M12- M6- CH12 Word 24
40 M13+ CH13 Word 26 IC6+
Tr
41 M13- IC6-
42
43 M14+ CH14 M7+
Tr Word 28
44 M14- M7- CH14 Word 28
45 M15+ CH15 IC7+
Tr Word 30
46 M15- IC7-
47
M M
48

Analog modules
Article number 6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0

Supply voltage
Load voltage L+
ters
Input current
transmitters
Power loss
Analog inputs
Input ranges
• Voltage Yes
• Current Yes
• Resistance Yes
• 1 V to 5 V Yes
• -1 V to +1 V Yes
• -10 V to +10 V Yes
• -2.5 V to +2.5 V Yes
– Input resistance (-2.5 V to +2.5 V) 1 MΩ

Analog modules

• -250 mV to +250 mV Yes
• -5 V to +5 V Yes
• -500 mV to +500 mV Yes
• 0 to 20 mA Yes
– Input resistance (0 to 20 mA) 50 Ω
• Type B Yes
– Input resistance (Type B) 1 MΩ
• Type E Yes
– Input resistance (Type E) 1 MΩ
• Type J Yes
– Input resistance (type J) 1 MΩ
• Type K Yes
– Input resistance (Type K) 1 MΩ
• Type L Yes
– Input resistance (Type L) 1 MΩ
• Type N Yes
– Input resistance (Type N) 1 MΩ
• Type R Yes
– Input resistance (Type R) 1 MΩ
• Type S Yes
– Input resistance (Type S) 1 MΩ
• Type T Yes
– Input resistance (Type T) 1 MΩ
• Type U Yes

Analog modules

– Input resistance (Type U) 1 MΩ
mometer
• Ni 100 Yes
• Ni 1000 Yes
• Pt 100 Yes
• Pt 1000 Yes
• Pt 200 Yes
• Pt 500 Yes
• 0 to 6000 ohms Yes; Usable up to 5000 Ohm
Thermocouple (TC)
Pt100
– for resistance thermometer Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000
Cable length
≤ 80 mV

Analog modules

channel
• Resolution with overrange (bit including 16 bit; 16 / 16 / 16
sign), max.
• Basic conversion time (ms) 6 / 20,1 / 23,5 ms
• Integration time (ms) 2,5 / 16,7 / 20 ms
time (ms)
– additional conversion time for wire-break 4.3 / 4.3 / 4.3 ms
monitoring
– additional conversion time for resistance 12 / 40,2 / 47 ms
measurement
• Interference voltage suppression for interfer‐ 400 / 60 / 50 Hz
• parameterizable Yes; in 4 stages
Encoder
er
er
connection
connection
connection
Errors/accuracies
Crosstalk between the inputs, min. 70 dB; > 70 dB
range
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 %; ±0.3 % at ±250 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2.5 V,
±5 V, 1 to 5 V, ±10 V; ±0.31 % at ±80 mV; ±0.32 %
at ±50 mV; ±0.35 % at ±25 mV

Analog modules

• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 %; at 0 to 20 mA, ±5 mA, ±10 mA, ±20 mA, 4 to
20 mA
• Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 %; ±0.3% at 0 to 48 Ohm (4-conductor meas‐
urement), 0 to 150 Ohm (4-conductor measure‐
ment), 0 to 300 Ohm (4-conductor measurement),
0 to 600 Ohm (4-conductor measurement), 0 to
5000 Ohm (4-conductor measurement, in range of
6000 Ohm); ±0.4% at 0 to 300 Ohm (3-conductor
measurement), 0 to 600 Ohm (3-conductor meas‐
urement), 0 to 5000 Ohm (3-conductor measure‐
ment, in range of 6000 Ohm);
range, (+/-)
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.15 %; ±0.15% at ±250 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2.5 V,
±5 V, 1 V to 5 V, ±10 V; ±0.17% at ±80 mV; ±0.19%
at ±50 mV; ±0.23% at ±25 mV
• Current, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.15 %; at 0 to 20 mA, ±5 mA, ±10 mA, ±20 mA, 4
to 20 mA
• Resistance, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.15 %; ±0.15 % at 0 to 48 ohms (4-conductor
measurement), 0 to 150 ohms (4-conductor meas‐
urement), 0 to 300 ohms (4-conductor measure‐
ment, in range of 6000 ohms); ±0.3 % at 0 to 300
ohms (3-conductor measurement), 0 to 600 ohms
(3-conductor measurement), 0 to 5000 ohms (3-
conductor measurement, in range of 6000 ohms)
range, (+/-)
• Thermocouple, relative to input range, (+/-) TC Type B (±7.6 K), TC Type R (±4.8 K) TC Type S
Alarms
• Limit value alarm Yes; Parameterizable

Analog modules

Diagnoses
Between the inputs and MANA (UCM) 60 V DC/30 V AC
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Analog modules

You set the mode of operation of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit by means of measuring range
modules on the module and in STEP 7.

Parameters

type
Enable
• End of scan cycle reached at input Yes/no No Static Channel
• Low limit -32512 to 32511
Diagnostics
Yes/no No
• Short-circuit to M
Measurement

Analog modules

type
• Measuring method Disabled U Static Channel
U Voltage
4DMU Current
(4-wire transducer)
2DMU Current
(2-wire transducer)
R-4L Resistance
(4-conductor connec‐
tion)
R-3L Resistance
(3-conductor connec‐
tion)
RTD-4L Thermal resistance
(linear, 4-wire connec‐
tion)
RTD-3L Thermal resistance (line‐
ar,
3-conductor connection)
TC-L Thermocouple (linear)
• Measuring range For information on configurable meas‐ ±10 V
uring ranges of input channels, refer to
the section "Measuring methods and
measuring ranges of SM 431; Ai 16x16
Bit".
• Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67 oC 0,00 oC Dynamic Module
• Noise suppression 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz 50 Hz
Weak
Medium
Strong
RTD on Channel 0
Reference temperature value
1
ER-2.
2
A point to note about channels for hardware interrupts with the end of scan cycle trigger
You can configure hardware interrupts for the end of scan cycle for one of the 16 channels
because the module can only trigger these interrupts on one channel.

respective section.

Analog modules

percent
100
63
50
0 20 40 60 80 100
average:
high:
Figure 5-34 Step response of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7QH00-0AB0)
Displaying parameter assignment errors

The SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit has diagnostics capability. Below you will find an overview of the
displays that are possible for modules with parameter assignment errors.
Table 5-62 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit
Incorrect parameter assign‐ Possible display Explanation

ment
Of the module • Module error You will find explanations of the di‐
agnostics information in the re‐
• Internal error
spective tables.
• Incorrect parameters
Affecting certain channels • Module error
• Internal error
• Channel error
• Channel information available
• Channel error vector
• Channel parameter assign‐
ment error

Analog modules
See also
Parameters of analog input modules (Page 180)

Analog modules
Measuring methods

restrictions as regards to the measuring method for the adjacent channels 0/1, 2/3, 4/5, 6/7, 8/9,
10/11, 12/13 and 14/15, as shown in the following table:
Measuring method, chan‐ Measuring method channel n+1

nel n deacti‐ Volt‐ Current Current R-4L R-3L RTD-4L RTD-3L TC-L
vated age 4-DMU 2-DMU
Disabled x x x x x
Voltage x x x
Four-wire thermal resistor x
3-wire thermal x
resistor
Thermocouples x x x
Example

Analog modules
Circuit for resistance and temperature measurement

431; AI 16 x 16 Bit:
Table 5-64 Channels for resistance and temperature measurement of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit
Measuring type parameter Permissible for Condition

channel n
Resistance 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 You must disable the "Measuring type" parameter for channels
(4-conductor connection) or 14 n+1 (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15).
Resistance 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 Reason: The connections of channel n+1 are used to supply the
(3-conductor connection) or 14 resistance that is connected to channel n.
Thermal resistance 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
(linear, 4-wire connection) or 14
Thermal resistance 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12
(linear, 3-wire connection) or 14
Thermocouple (linear) 0 to 15 You can select the reference junction. It is only advisable to spec‐
ify a reference junction with thermocouples.
Circuit for reference junction compensation for thermocouples

If you select "RTD on Channel 0" as a reference junction for reference junction compensation for
thermocouples, the following applies:
Table 5-65 Reference junction compensation via RTD on channel 0 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit
Reference junction parameters Permissible for channel n Condition

RTD on Channel 0 2 to 15 You must connect and configure on channel 0 a
resistance thermometer with linearization, a 3- or
4-conductor connection in climatic range. This
means that channels 0 and 1 are assigned.
Reason: If channel 0 is to be used as the reference
junction, a resistance-type sensor must be con‐
nected there to record absolute temperatures in
the climatic range.
Unused channels
Unused channels can be left open. Set the measuring range modules to position "A". You can
interference by short-circuiting the channels.

Analog modules
Measuring ranges
You set the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and the

V: Voltage ± 25 mV A The digitized analog values
± 50 mV are listed in the section "Rep‐
± 80 mV resentation of analog values
± 250 mV for analog input channels" in
± 500 mV the voltage measuring range.
±1V
± 2.5 V
±5V
1 to 5 V
± 10 V
2DMU: Current (2-wire sen‐ 4 to 20 mA D To supply these transducers
sor) with current you must con‐
nect 24 V to the L+ and M
front connector terminals.
The digitized analog values
are listed in the section "Rep‐
resentation of analog values
for analog input channels" in
the current measuring range.
4DMU: Current (4-wire sen‐ ± 5 mA C The digitized analog values
sor) ± 10 mA are listed in the section "Rep‐
0 to 20 mA resentation of analog values
4 to 20 mA for analog input channels" in
± 20 mA the current measuring range.
R-3L: Resistance 300 Ω A The digitized analog values
(3-conductor connection) 600 Ω are listed in the section "Rep‐
6000 Ω resentation of analog values
(maximum 5000 Ω) for analog input channels" in
R-4L: Resistance 48 Ω the resistance measuring
150 Ω range.
(4-conductor connection)
300 Ω
600 Ω
6000 Ω
(maximum 5000 Ω)
TC-L: Thermocouple (linear) Type B A The digitized analog values
(Temperature measurement) Type N are listed in the section "Rep‐
Type E resentation of analog values
Type R for analog input channels" in
Type S the temperature range.
Type J
Type L
Type T
Type K
Type U

Analog modules

RTD-3L: Thermal resistance Pt 100 Climatic A The digitized analog values
(linear, 3-conductor connec‐ Pt 200 Climatic are listed in the section "Rep‐
tion) (temperature measure‐ Pt 500 Climatic resentation of analog values
ment) Pt 1000 Climatic for analog input channels" in
Ni 100 Climatic the temperature range.
RTD-4L: Thermal resistance
Ni 1000 Climatic
(linear, 4-conductor connec‐ Pt 100 Standard
tion) (temperature measure‐ Pt 200 Standard
ment) Pt 500 Standard
Pt 1000 Standard
Ni 100 Standard
Ni 1000 Standard
Default
The "voltage" measuring method and "± 10 V" measuring range are set by default in STEP 7. You
can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without configuring the
SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit in STEP 7.
Wire break monitoring

The wire break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements (TC, RTD) or
resistance measurements. Always configure the wire break check in these cases as this ensures
that in the event of a wire break the measured value provided by the module accepts the data
for overrun 7FFFH.
Special characteristics of the wire break check for the voltage measurement methods
In some transducers, incorrect measured values may occur due to the fact that the wire break
check is enabled. If so, disable the wire break check.
Reason: Some transducers try to correct the test current and in doing so corrupt the setpoint
value they provide.
Points to note about the wire break check when current sensors are connected
A wire break check of current sensors is not possible for the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit except in life-
zero areas. You can therefore only configure the wire break check for the "Current (4-wire
transducer)" measuring method and the "4 to 20 mA" measuring range.
Checking for reference channel errors when connecting thermocouples

If you have connected a thermocouple, you can then enable the "Reference channel error"
diagnostics if you have configured an "RTD on Channel 0" or "Reference Temperature Value"
reference junction.

Analog modules
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit (6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)
Points to note about checking for "Underflow" with some measuring methods and measuring
ranges
There is now underflow in life-zero areas. A value that is too low or is negative is interpreted as
a wire break. You can therefore not configure the underflow check for the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit
for the following measuring methods and ranges:
Table 5-67 Points to note when checking for "Underflow"
Measuring method Measuring range

Voltage 1 to 5 V
Current (4-wire sensor) 4 to 20 mA
Current (2-wire sensor) 4 to 20 mA
Points to note about the "Short-circuit to M" diagnostics

You can only configure the check for "Short-circuit to M" for the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit for the
"Current (2-wire transducer)" measuring method.
5.24 Analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

(6ES7431-7KF10-0AB0)
5.24.1 Features
Overview
The analog input module SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit has the following features:
• 8 differential inputs for resistance thermometer
• Resistance thermometer configurable
• Linearization of characteristic curves of the resistance thermometer
• Update rate 25 ms for 8 channels
• Analog section isolated from CPU
• The maximum permissible common-mode voltage between the channel and the central
grounding point is 60 V DC / 30 V AC (SELV)

Analog modules
Calibration software
The calibration software is only available over the Internet. You will find the latest version of the
calibration software under entry ID 12443337.
Following the installation of this software, you can specify user-specific calibration values for
each channel and each input range. Further information can be found under ID 12436891 on
the Customer Support FAQ page.
Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
SO+0
SE+0
SE-0
AGND CH0
CH1
Electrical
isolation
CH2
Backplane
A/Dconverter bus Bus S7-400
CH3 interface
Internal
CH4
power supply
CH5
CH6
SO+7
SE+7
SE-7
AGND CH7
Figure 5-35 Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Analog modules
Note
An external protective network is required for the signal lines in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5
(12 V Blitzductor, model CT919-506, connected in series with all inputs as recommended by the
manufacturer).

Analog modules
Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
INTF 1
EXTF 2
3
4
5
6 SE+0
7 SE-0 Word 0
CH0
8 SO0
9 AGND
10
11 SE+1
12 SE-1
CH1 Word 1
13 SO1
14 AGND
15
16 SE+2
17 SE-2
CH2 Word 2
18 SO2
19 AGND
20
21 SE+3
22 SE-3 Word 3
CH3
23 SO3
24 AGND
25
26
27
28 SE+4
29 SE-4
CH4 Word 4
30 SO4
31 AGND
32
33 SE+5
34 SE-5
CH5 Word 5
35 SO5
36 AGND
37
38 SE+6
39 SE-6
CH6 Word 6
40 SO6
41 AGND
42
43 SE+7
44 SE-7
CH7 Word 7
45 SO7
46 AGND
47
48
Figure 5-36 Connection diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Analog modules
Technical specifications for SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit

Input current
Power loss
Analog inputs
permissible input voltage for voltage input (de‐ 35 V; 35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 s (mark to
struction limit), max. space ratio 1:20)
Constant measurement current for resistance- 1 mA
Input ranges
• Voltage No
• Current No
• Thermocouple No
• Resistance Yes
mometer
• Ni 100 Yes
– Input resistance (Ni 100) > 10 000 ohms
• Ni 1000 Yes; Different characteristics selectable: Europe/
U.S.
– Input resistance (Ni 1000) > 10 000 ohms
• Pt 100 Yes
– Input resistance (Pt 100) > 10 000 ohms
• Pt 1000 Yes
• Pt 200 Yes
• Pt 500 Yes
– for resistance thermometer Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni1000; dif‐
ferent characteristics selectable (Europe/U.S.)
Cable length
±80 mV

Analog modules

channel
sign), max.
• Basic conversion time (ms) 8 / 23 / 25 ms
• Integration time (ms) 20 ms at 50 Hz (entire module incl. wire break)
time (ms)
– additional conversion time for wire-break 110 ms / 4 ms
monitoring
– additional conversion time for wire-break none
• Interference voltage suppression for interfer‐ none/ 60 / 50 Hz
• Basic execution time of the module (all chan‐ 8 ms; 8 / 23 / 25 ms
nels released)
• parameterizable Parameters can be assigned in the 4 levels
Encoder
connection
connection
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (relative to input range), (+/-) With Pt100: ±0.2 °C (RTD-4L), ±0.3 °C (RTD-3L);
with Pt200: ±0.2 °C (RTD-4L), ±0.2 °C (RTD-3L);
with Ni100: ±0.1 °C (RTD-4L), ±0.2 °C (RTD-3L);
Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 °C (relative With Pt100: ±0.2 °C (RTD-4L), ±0.3 °C (RTD-3L);
to input range), (+/-) with Pt200: ±0.2 °C (RTD-4L), ±0.2 °C (RTD-3L);
range
• Resistance thermometer, relative to input ±1 °C
range, (+/-)
• Resistance thermometer, relative to input ±0,2 °C
range, (+/-)

Analog modules

Alarms
• Limit value alarm Yes
Diagnoses
between the inputs (UCM) none
Isolation
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Analog modules
5.24.2 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

You set the operating mode of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit in STEP 7.
Parameters
Table 5-68 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

type
Enable
Trigger for hardware interrupt 3)
- Dynamic Channel
• High limit 32767 to - 32768
• Low limit - 32768 to 32767
Diagnostics
Measurement
• Measuring method Disabled RTD-3L
(linear, 4-conductor con‐
nection)
(linear, 3-conductor con‐
nection)
• Measuring range Refer to the respective section for the Pt 100 Stand‐
measuring ranges of the input channels ard
that you can set.
• Temperature unit Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit Degrees Cel‐ Static Module
sius

Analog modules

type
• Temperature coefficient for For platinum (Pt) 0,00385 Static Channel
temperature measurement 0.00385 Ω/Ω/ °C
with thermal resistance (RTD) 0.003916 Ω/Ω/ °C
0.003902 Ω/Ω/ °C
0.003920 Ω/Ω/ °C
For nickel (Ni)
0.00618 Ω/Ω/ °C
0.00672 Ω/Ω/ °C
• Noise suppression 60 Hz; 50 Hz; none 60 Hz
Smoothing None None Static Channel
Weak
Medium
Strong
1
ER-2.
2
3
The limit values must be within the temperature range of the connected sensor.

respective section.

percent
100
63
50
0 20 40 60 80 100

average:
high:
Figure 5-37 Step response of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

Analog modules

The SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit is capable of diagnostics. Below you will find an overview of the
Table 5-69 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit
Incorrect parameter as‐ Possible display Explanation

signment
Of the module • Module error You will find explanations of
the diagnostics information in
• Internal error
the respective tables.
• No module parameters
• Internal error
• Channel error
• Channel parameter assignment error
• User calibration does not correspond
to the parameter assignment
See also
Parameters of analog input modules (Page 180)

Analog modules
5.24.3 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16

Bit
Measuring methods
You can set the temperature measurement as the measuring method for the input channels.
Unused channels
For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces the
module's cycle time.
Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges by means of the "Measuring range" parameter in STEP 7.
Table 5-70 Measuring ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit

RTD-3L: Thermal resistance Pt 100 Standard The digitized analog values are listed in the
(linear, 3-conductor connec‐ Pt 200 Standard section "Analog Values of the Analog Input
tion) Pt 500 Standard Channels" in the temperature range.
(temperature measurement) Pt 1000 Standard
RTD-4L: Thermal resistance Ni 100 Standard
(linear, 4-conductor connec‐ Ni 1000 Standard
tion)
(temperature measurement)
Default
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are "Thermal resistor (linear, 3-conductor
connection)" for the measuring method and "Pt 100 Standard" for the measuring range. You can
use this measuring method with this measuring range without configuring the SM 431; AI 8 x
RTD x 16 Bit with STEP 7.
See also
Representation of analog values of analog input channels (Page 148)

Analog modules

(6ES7431-7KF00-0AB0)
5.25.1 Features
Overview
• 8 isolated differential inputs for voltage/current/ temperature measurement
• 26 measuring range settings
• Linearization of characteristic curves of the thermocouple
• Analog section isolated from CPU
• Field connection (6ES7431-7K00-6AA0) with internal reference temperature (included in
scope of delivery)
Calibration software
The calibration software is only available over the Internet. You will find the latest version of the
calibration software under entry ID 12443337.
Following the installation of this software, you can specify user-specific calibration values for
each channel and each input range. Further information can be found under ID 12436891 on
the Customer Support FAQ page.

Analog modules
M0+ A/Dconverter
M0+
R0
Internal
M0- supply
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
Backplane
Bus S7-400
bus interface
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
Note
An external protective network for the signal lines is required in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5
(12 V Blitzductor, model CT919-506, connected in series with all inputs as recommended by the
manufacturer).

Analog modules
Optional connector Connector with Thermocouples

(screw-type) temperature reference Voltage measurement
Current measurement
INTF 1
EXTF 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 M0+ M0+
0 M0+ M0+
10 CH0 Word 0
11 R0 R0
12 M0- M0-
13
14 M1+ M1+
1 M1+ M1+
15
R1 R1 CH1 Word 1
16
17 M1- M1-
18
19 M2+ M2+
2 M2+ M2+
20
A R2 V R2 CH2 Word 2
21
22 M2- M2-
23
24 M3 + M3 +
3
25 M3 + M3 + CH3 Word 3
V R3 V R3
26
27 M3- M3-
28
29 M4+ M4+
4 30 M4+ M4+
V R4 A R4 CH4 Word 4
31
32 M4- M4-
33
34 M5+ M5+
5 M5+ M5+
35
A R5 A R5 CH5 Word 5
36
37 M5- M5-
38
39 M6+ M6+
6 M6+ M6+
40
Tr Tr CH6 Word 6
41 R6 R6
42 M6- M6-
43
44 M7+ M7+
7 M7+ M7+
45 CH7
Tr Tr Word 7
46 R7 R7
47 M7- M7-
48
6ES7492-1AL00-0AA0 6ES7431-7KF00-6AA0

Analog modules

Input current
Power loss
Analog inputs
permissible input voltage for voltage input (de‐ 35 V; 35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 s (mark to
struction limit), max. space ratio 1:20)
Input ranges
• Voltage Yes
• Current Yes
• Resistance No
• 1 V to 5 V Yes
– Input resistance (1 V to 5 V) > 2 000 ohms
• -1 V to +1 V Yes
• -10 V to +10 V Yes
• -100 mV to +100 mV Yes
• -2.5 V to +2.5 V Yes
• -250 mV to +250 mV Yes
• -5 V to +5 V Yes
• -500 mV to +500 mV Yes
• 0 to 20 mA Yes
• -3.2 mA to +3.2 mA Yes
• Type B Yes
– Input resistance (Type B) > 2 000 ohms

Analog modules

• Type E Yes
• Type J Yes
• Type K Yes
• Type L Yes
• Type N Yes
– Input resistance (Type N) > 2 000 ohms
• Type R Yes
• Type S Yes
• Type T Yes
• Type U Yes
Thermocouple (TC)
– connection for compensating the cold 6ES7431-7KF00-6AA0
junction
– internal temperature compensation Yes
Cable length
channel
sign), max.
• Basic conversion time (ms) 10 / 16,7 / 20 / 100
• Integration time (ms) 2,5 / 16,7 / 20 / 100
time (ms)
– additional conversion time for wire-break 1 ms (module)
• Interference voltage suppression for interfer‐ 400 / 60 / 50 / 10 Hz
• parameterizable Parameters can be assigned in the 4 levels
Encoder

Analog modules

er
connection
Errors/accuracies
Crosstalk between the inputs, min. 95 dB; > 95 dB for voltage range ≥ 2.5 V; >120 dB
for current, thermocouple and voltage range ≥ 2.5
V
range
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.3 %
• Voltage, relative to input range, (+/-) 0.1 %
• Common mode interference, min. 95 dB; > 95 dB for voltage range ≥ 2.5 V; >120 dB
for current, thermocouple and voltage range ≥ 2.5
V
Alarms
• Limit value alarm Yes
Diagnoses
Isolation
Isolation tested with 1 500 V DC
Dimensions

Analog modules

Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Analog modules

You set the operating mode of the SM 431; AI 8 x16 Bit in STEP 7.
Parameters

type
Enable
• Hardware interrupt 1 Yes/no No Dynamic
• Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 - Static
Trigger for hardware interrupt 3)

• Low limit - 32768 to 32767 -
Diagnostics
Measurement
• Measuring method Disabled TC-L Static Channel
U Voltage
4DMU Current
(4-wire transduc‐
er)
TC-L Thermocouple
(linear)
• Measuring range For information on configurable Type J
measuring ranges of input chan‐
nels, refer to the section "Measur‐
ing methods and measuring rang‐
es of SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit".
• Reference temperature - 273.15 to 327.67 oC 100 oC Dynamic Module
-327.68 to 327.67 C o

Analog modules

type
• Temperature unit4 Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahren‐ Degrees Celsius Static Module
heit
• Noise suppression 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz 60 Hz
• Smoothing None, weak, medium, strong None
• Reference junction (reference None Internal Static Module
to the cold junction) Internal
Reference temperature value dy‐
namic
1
ER-2.
2
3
The limit values must be within the temperature range of the connected sensor.
4
Valid for the format of the output temperature and the dynamic reference temperature

For generally valid information on analog value smoothing, refer to the section "Conversion and
cycle and response times of analog modules".
The cycle time of the module is a constant in the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit that is not dependent
on the number of channels that are enabled. It therefore has no effect on the step response,
which is defined by the parameter assignment of interference frequency suppression and
smoothing.
Step response
Table 5-72 How response times depend on the configured interference frequency suppression and smoothing of the SM
431; AI 8 x 16 Bit
Interference frequency sup‐ Response time in ms with configured smoothing:

pression in Hz
None Weak Medium Strong
10 100 200 1600 3200
50 20 40 320 640
60 16,7 33,3 267 533
400 10 20 160 320
The following figures illustrate the contents of table above. They show the response time
required for a step response before the smoothed analog value is almost applied to 100%.
The figures apply to every change of signal at an analog input.

Analog modules
Step response at an interference frequency suppression of 10 Hz

percent
100
Smoothing
None:
Low:
average:
high:
0
800 1600 2400 3200
100 Response time in ms
200
Figure 5-40 Step response at 10 Hz interference frequency suppression of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit

percent
100
Smoothing
None:
Low:
average:
high:
0 40 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640

20 Response time in ms

Analog modules

percent
100
Smoothing
None:
Low:
average:
high:
0 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640

16,7 267 533
33,3 Response time in ms

percent
100
Smoothing
None:
Low:
average:
high:
0 80 160 240 320 400 480 560 640

10
Response time in ms
20

Analog modules

The SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit has diagnostics capability. Below you will find an overview of the
Table 5-73 Diagnostic information of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit
Incorrect parameter as‐ Possible display Explanation

signment
Of the module • Module error You will find explanations of
the diagnostics information in
• Internal error
the respective tables.
• No module parameters
• Internal error
• Channel error
• Channel parameter assignment error
• User calibration does not correspond
to the parameter assignment
See also

Analog modules
Measuring methods
You perform the setting with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7.
Unused channels
For unused channels, set the "measuring method" parameter to "deactivated". This reduces the
module's cycle time.
Measuring ranges
Set the measuring ranges by means of the "Measuring range" parameter in STEP 7.

V: Voltage ±25 mV The digitized analog values are listed in the sec‐
±50 mV tion "Representation of analog values for analog
±80 mV input channels" in the voltage measuring range.
±100 mV
±250 mV
±500 mV
±1 V
±2.5 V
±5 V
±10 V
from 1 to 5 V
4DMU: Current (4-wire sensor) ±3.2 mA The digitized analog values are listed in the sec‐
±5 mA tion "Representation of analog values for analog
±10 mA input channels" in the current measuring range.
±20 mA
from 0 to 20 mA
from 4 to 20 mA
TC-L: Thermocouple (linear) Type B The digitized analog values are listed in the sec‐
(Temperature measurement) Type N tion "Representation of analog values for analog
Type E input channels" in the temperature range.
Type R
Type S
Type J
Type L
Type T
Type K
Type U

Analog modules
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit (6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)
Default
The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are "Thermocouple (linear)" for the measuring
method and "Type J" for the measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring
method and measuring range without configuring the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit in STEP 7.
5.26 Analog output module SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit

(6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0)
5.26.1 Features
Overview
SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit has the following properties:
• 8 outputs
• the output can be selected for each channel as
– Voltage output
– current output
• Analog section potential-free relative to CPU and load voltage
• Maximum permissible common mode voltage between the channels or between channels
and MANA 3 V DC

Analog modules
Block diagram of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit
CH0
A
CH1
Bus S7-400
Bus control
CH2
CH3
CH4
D CH5
CH6
CH7
24 V
L+/M
Analog supply
Figure 5-44 Block diagram of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit

Analog modules
Connection diagram of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit
Voltage output Current output
1
2
3
L+ L+ L+
4
5
6 QV0 CH0 Word 0 QI0 CH0 Word 0
7 S0+
8 S0-
9
10
12 S1 +
13 S1-
14
15
17 S2+
18 S2-
19
20
22 S3 +
23 S3-
24
25 MANA M ANA M ANA
26
27
29 S4+
30 S4-
31
32
34 S5+
35 S5-
36
37
39 S6+
40 S6-
41
42
44 S7+
45 S7-
46
47
M
48 M M
Figure 5-45 Connection diagram of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit

Analog modules
Technical specifications of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 bit
Article number 6ES7432-1HF00-0AB0

Supply voltage
Load voltage L+
Input current
from supply and load voltage L+ (without load), 200 mA; at rated load: max. 400 mA
max.
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 9W
Analog outputs
Number of analog outputs 8
Voltage output, short-circuit protection Yes
Voltage output, short-circuit current, max. 30 mA
Current output, no-load voltage, max. 19 V
Output ranges, voltage
• 0 to 10 V Yes
• 1 V to 5 V Yes
• -10 V to +10 V Yes
Output ranges, current
• 0 to 20 mA Yes
Connection of actuators
• for voltage output two-wire connection Yes; possible, without compensation of the line re‐
sistances
• for voltage output four-wire connection Yes; possible
• for current output two-wire connection Yes; possible
Load impedance (in rated range of output)
• with voltage outputs, min. 1 kΩ
• with voltage outputs, capacitive load, max. 1 µF
• with current outputs, max. 500 Ω; 600 ohms if common-mode-voltage re‐
duced to <1 V
Destruction limits against externally applied
voltages and currents
• Voltages at the outputs towards MANA 20 V; max. 20 V continuous; 75 V for 1 ms (mark to
space ratio 1: 20)
• Current, max. 40 mA; Permanent
Cable length
Analog value generation for the outputs

Analog modules

channel
sign), max.
• Conversion time (per channel) 420 µs; 420 µs in the ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20
mA; 300 µs in all ranges
• Basic execution time of the module (all chan‐ 3.36 ms; 3.36 ms in the ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20
nels released) mA; 2.4 ms in all other ranges
Settling time
• for resistive load 0.1 ms
• for capacitive load 3.5 ms
• for inductive load 0.5 ms
Errors/accuracies
Output ripple (relative to output range, band‐ 0.05 %
width 0 to 50 kHz), (+/-)
Linearity error (relative to output range), (+/-) 0.05 %
Temperature error (relative to output range), 0.02 %/K
(+/-)
Crosstalk between the outputs, min. 40 dB
to output range), (+/-)
range
• Voltage, relative to output range, (+/-) 0.5 %; ±10 V, 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V
• Current, relative to output range, (+/-) 1 %; ±20 mA, 4 to 20 mV
• Voltage, relative to output range, (+/-) 0.5 %; ±10 V, 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V
• Current, relative to output range, (+/-) 0.5 %; ±20 mA, 0 to 20 mA
Alarms No
Potential separation analog outputs
between the outputs (UCM) 3 V DC
between S- and MANA (UCM) 3 V DC
Isolation

Analog modules

Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 210 mm
Weights

Analog modules
5.26.2 Commissioning the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit
Parameters
For an overview of configurable parameters and defaults, refer to the "Parameters of analog
output modules" table.
Assigning parameters to channels

The parameters can be set separately at each output channel of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit. You can
thus assign individual parameters to each output channel.
See also

Analog modules
5.26.3 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit
Configuration of analog output circuits

You can configure the outputs for operation as voltage or current outputs, or disable these. You
configure the output circuits at the "output type" parameter in STEP 7.
Unused channels
To make sure that unused output channels of SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit are de-energized, set the
"Output type" parameter to "deactivated" and leave the terminal open.
Output ranges
You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7.
Table 5-75 Output ranges of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit
Selected type of output Output range Description

Voltage 1 V to 5 V The digitized analog values are listed in
0 V to 10 V the section "Representation of analog
± 10 V values for analog output channels" in the
Current 0 to 20 mA voltage or current output range.
4 to 20 mA
± 20 mA
Default
The output type "Voltage" and output range "± 10 V" are set by default at the module. You can
always use this combination of output type and range without having to program the SM 432;
AO 8 x 13 Bit in STEP 7.

Interface modules 6
6.1 Common features of the interface modules
Function
Interface modules (a send IM and a receive IM) are required if one or more expansion racks (ER)
are to be connected to a central rack (CR). This configuration is described in the Installation
manual.
Configuration
Interface modules must always be used together. The send modules (send IMs) are inserted in
the CR, whilst the corresponding receive modules (receive IMs) are plugged into the series-
connected ER.
Table 6-1 Interface modules of the S7-400
Partner Areas of application

IM 460-0 Send IM for local link without PS transfer; with communication bus
IM 461-0 Receive IM for local link without PS transfer; with communication bus
IM 460-1 Send IM for local link with PS transfer; without communication bus
IM 461-1 Receive IM for local link with PS transfer; without communication bus
IM 460-3 Send IM for remote link up to 102.25 m; with communication bus
IM 461-3 Receive IM for remote link up to 102.25 m; with communication bus
IM 460-4 Send IM for remote link up to 605 m; without communication bus
IM 461-4 Receive IM for remote link up to 605 m; without communication bus
Overview of the connections

Note the rules for connections in the section after next.
Table 6-2 Overview of the connections
Local connection Remote connection

Send IM 460-0 460-1 460-3 460-4
Receive IM 461-0 461-1 461-3 461-4
Max. number of connectable EMs per line 4 1 4 4
Max. distance 5m 1.5 m 102.25 m 605 m
V transfer No Yes No No
Max. current transfer per interface - 5A - -
Communication bus transmission Yes No Yes No

Interface modules
Connection possibilities for central racks and expansion racks
IM 460-4
IM 460-3
IM 460-1
Central controller IM 460-0
Expansion without 5-V transmission at local range

Expansion device EC 1 Expansion device EC 4
IM 461-0 IM 461-0
Line length max. 5 m
Expansion with 5-V transmission in local range

Expansion device EC 1
IM 461-1
Line length max. 1.5 m
Expansion in plant-wide field environment
IM 461-3 IM 461-3
Line length max. 102.25 m
IM 461-4 IM 461-4
Line length max. 605 m

Interface modules
Rules for connection

When you connect a central rack to expansion racks, you must observe the following rules:
• You can connect up to 21 ERs of the S7-400 to one CR.
• The ERs are assigned numbers to identify them. The rack number must be set on the coding
switch of the receive IM. Any rack number between 1 and 21 may be assigned. Numbers must
not be duplicated.
• You may insert up to six send IMs in one CR. However, only two send IMs with 5 V transfer are
allowed in one CR.
• Each line connected to the interface of a send IM can comprise up to four ERs (without 5 V
transfer) or one ER (with 5 V transfer).
• The exchange of data via the communication bus is limited to 7 racks, meaning the CR and
ER numbers 1 to 6.
• The maximum (total) cable lengths specified for the type of connection must not be
exceeded.
Table 6-3 Cable for different connections
Connection type Maximum (total) line

length
Local connection with 5 V transfer via IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 1.5 m
Local connection without 5 V transfer via IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 5m
Remote connection via IM 460-3 and IM 461-3 102.25 m
Remote connection via IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 605 m
Terminator
The bus must be terminated in the last EU of a line. To do this, plug in the appropriate terminator
in the lower front connector of the receive IM in the last EU of the line. Unused front connectors
in a send IM do not have to be terminated. The IM 461-1 does not require a terminator.
Table 6-4 Terminators for the Receive IMs
Receive IM Terminator
IM 461-0 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0
IM 461-3 6ES7461-3AA00-7AA0
IM 461-4 6ES7461-4AA00-7AA0
The following figure shows you a typical configuration with send IMs, receive IMs and
terminators.

Interface modules
2
3
5
Figure 6-1 Example: Configuration with send IMs, receive IMs and terminators
(1) Receive IM
(2) Terminator
(3) Receive IM
(4) Send IM
(5) CR
Cables
Precut cables are available in different fixed lengths for connecting the individual interface
modules. (See Appendix "Accessories and spare parts").
Table 6-5 Cables for interface modules
Interface modules Cables

IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 6ES7468-1... (P bus and communication bus are transferred)
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 6ES7468-3... (P bus is transferred; mounting rack is supplied with
current via the IM)
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 6ES7468-1...

Interface modules
Installation and removal of the modules during operation

Please read the following warning on the insertion and removal of the interface modules and
associated cables.
CAUTION
Data may be lost or corrupted.
Removing or inserting the interface modules and/or their associated cables under voltage can
result in the loss or corruption of data.
Switch off the power supply modules to the CR and ERs you are working on before you carry out
any changes.

Interface modules
6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-0 (6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0)
6.2 Interface modules IM 460-0 (6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and IM

461-0 (6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0)
Function
The interface module pair IM 460-0 (send IM) and IM 461-0 (receive IM) are used for a local link.
Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0
IM 460-0 IM 461-0
X IM 460-0 IM 461-0 X
460-XXXXX-XXXX 461-XXXXX-XXXX
/('V
EXTF INTF
EXTF INTF EXTF
C1 EXTF
C2
',3VZLWFK
8QGHUFRYHU
&RQQHFWRU;
3RUW& IN
X1 X1
&RQQHFWRU;
3RUW& OUT
'RQRWSOXJWHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWRU
X2 X2
Figure 6-2 Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0

Interface modules
Operator controls and indicators on the send IM
Table 6-6 Operator controls and indicators on the send IM
LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (terminator
missing or broken cable)
C1 LED (green) Line 1 (via front connector X1, connection 1) is correct.
C1 LED (flashing An expansion rack in the line is not ready for operation because:
green) • The power supply module is not switched on
• A module has not yet completed the initialization process
Front connectors Connector (output) for line 1 and line 2
X1 and X2 X1 = upper front connector; X2 = lower front connector
The LEDs EXTF, C1 and C2 do not light up if the terminator is not inserted or the line is
interrupted when in POWER ON mode. In this case the IM 460 identifies an unoccupied
interface.
Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM
Table 6-7 Operator controls and indicators of the receive IM
LEDs Meaning
INTF LED (red) Lights up if a rack number > 21 or = 0 was set.
Lights up if you have changed the rack number under voltage.
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the terminator
is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization process).
DIP switch DIP switch to set the number of the mounting rack.
Front connector Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.
X1
Front connector X2 Lower connector (output) for the cable to the next interface module or for the
terminator.
Parameter assignment for the mounting rack number

Using the DIP switch on the front panel of the module, you must set the number of the mounting
rack in which the receive IM is installed. The permitted range is 1 to 21.

Interface modules
Setting/changing the number

Proceed as follows:
1. Set the switch of the power supply module in the expansion rack in which you want to make
the change to the position (output voltage 0 V).
2. Enter the number using the DIP switch.
3. Switch the power supply module on again.
Specifications of the IM 460-0 and IM 461-0
Article number 6ES7460-0AA01-0AB0 6ES7461-0AA01-0AA0

Input current
from backplane bus 5 V DC, max. 140 mA 290 mA
Power loss
Power loss, max. 700 mW 1 450 mW
Cable length between first and last inter‐ 5 m
face module, max.
termination plug 6ES7461-0AA0-7AA0 6ES7461-0AA0-7AA1
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 280 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 600 g 610 g

Interface modules
6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1 (6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)
6.3 Interface modules IM 460-1 (6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0) and IM 461-1

(6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0)
Function
The interface module pair IM 460-1 (send IM) and IM 461-1 (receive IM) are used for a local link
(up to a maximum 1.5 m in total). A 5 V supply voltage is also transferred with these interface
modules. Please particularly remember the following points:
• The current requirements of the module plugged into the ER must not exceed 5 V/5 A.
• You can only connect one ER per line.
• The modules in this mounting rack are not supplied with 24 V and are not backed up.
• The communication bus is not transferred with the interface module pair IM 460-1 and IM
461-1.
• You must not use a power supply module in the ER.
Note
If you connect an ER via a local link with 5 V transmission, ungrounded operation is
prescribed for the ER (see Installation Manual).

Interface modules
Position of the operator controls and indicators of the IM 460-1 and IM 461-1
IM 460-1 IM 461-1
X IM 460-1 X
LEDs
EXTF INTF
EXTF INTF EXTF
C1 EXTF
C2
DC 5 V
DC 5 V
',3VZLWFK
8QGHUFRYHU
&RQQHFWRU;
3RUW& IN
X1
X1
&RQQHFWRU;
3RUW&
'RQRWSOXJWHUPLQDWLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWRU
X2
LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (wire break)
C1 LED (flashing A module has not yet completed the initialization process.
green)

Interface modules
LEDs Meaning
C2 LED (flashing A module has not yet completed the initialization process.
green)
The LEDs EXTF, C1 and C2 do not light up if the line is interrupted when in POWER ON mode.
In this case the IM 460 identifies an unoccupied interface.
LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if a module has not
yet completed the initialization process but not when the CC is switched off)
5 VDC (green) Power supply in the ER is correct.
Front connector Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.
X1
CAUTION
Modules can be damaged.
If you want to connect an expansion rack via the IM 461-1 interface module and use a power
supply module in this expansion rack, modules may be damaged
Do not use a power supply module in the expansion rack that you want to connect to the central
rack via the IM 461-1 interface module.
Parameter assignment for the mounting rack number


Proceed as follows:
1. Set the power supply module in the CR to the position (Output voltage 0 V).

Interface modules
Article number 6ES7460-1BA01-0AB0 6ES7461-1BA01-0AA0

Input current
from backplane bus 5 V DC, max. 85 mA 120 mA
Power loss
Power loss, max. 425 mW 600 mW
Cable length between first and last inter‐ 1.5 m
face module, max.
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 280 mm
Weights

Interface modules
6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM 461-3 (6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)
6.4 Interface modules IM 460-3 (6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0) and IM

461-3 (6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0)
Function
The interface module pair IM 460-3 (send IM) and IM 461-3 (receive IM) are used for a remote
link of up to a maximum 102.25 m (exactly: 100 m plus inputs/outputs of 0.75 m in the line).
Position of operator control and display elements

IM 460-3 IM 461-3
X IM 460-3 IM 461-3 X
LEDs
INTF
EXTF
EXTF INTF EXTF
C1 EXTF
C2
DIP switch
Under cover
Connector X1:
Interface C1 IN
X1
X1
Connector X2:
Interface C2 OUT
X2 X2

Interface modules
LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 is faulty (wire break)
The LEDs EXTF, C1 and C2 do not light up if the terminator is not inserted or the line is
interrupted when in POWER ON mode. In this case the IM 460 identifies an unoccupied
interface.
LEDs Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault (line fault, for example, if the termi‐
nator is not inserted or if a module has not yet completed the initialization
process, or if the CC is switched off)
Front connector X1 Upper connector (input) for the cable from the previous interface module.
Front connector X2 Lower connector (output) for the cable to the next interface module or for the
terminator.
If required, you can change the distance setting for the line on the programming device
using STEP 7.
The default setting for the distance is 100 m.

Interface modules
Ensure that the distance corresponds as closely as possible to the current length (the sum of
all the cables per line) as this will accelerate data transmission.
Note
The distance set must always be longer than the actual length of cable per line.

Proceed as follows:
1. Set the switch of the power supply module in the expansion rack in which you want to make
the change to the position (output voltage 0 V).
Article number 6ES7460-3AA01-0AB0 6ES7461-3AA01-0AA0

Input current
from backplane bus 5 V DC, max. 1 550 mA 620 mA
Power loss
Power loss, max. 7 750 mW 3 100 mW
Cable length between first and last inter‐ 102.25 m
face module, max.
termination plug 6ES7461-3AA0-7AA0 6ES7461-3AA0-7AA1
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 280 mm
Weights

Interface modules

S5 interface IM 463-2 7
7.1 Using SIMATIC S5 expansion units in an S7-400
Order number
6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0
Area of application
The IM 463-2 interface module is used for distributed connection of S5 expansion racks to an
S7-400. You can plug the IM 463-2 into the central rack of the S7-400. You insert an IM 314 in
the S5 expansion rack.
This allows you to connect the following S5 expansion racks to an S7-400:
• EG 183U with IM 314 in slot 3
• ER 701-2 with IM 314 in slot 7
• ER 701-3 with IM 314 in slot 7
Accordingly, you can use all digital and analog I/O modules that fit into these.
Constraints
If you connect an S5 expansion rack to a central rack of the S7-400 via the IM 463-2, the
constraints regarding EMI resistance, ambient conditions etc. that are valid for the SIMATIC S5,
apply to the complete system.
Note
If the environment is contaminated by radiated interference, you must connect the shield of the
cable type 721 (see Installation manual).

S5 interface IM 463-2
7.1 Using SIMATIC S5 expansion units in an S7-400
Mounting and removing the IM 463-2 during operation

Observe the following warning when mounting and removing the IM 463-2 and associated
connecting cables.
CAUTION
Data may be lost or corrupted. If you remove or mount the IM 463-2 and/or associated
connecting cable under voltage, data may be lost or corrupted. Switch off the power supply
modules of the central rack on which you are working before making any interventions.

7.2 Rules for connecting S5 expansion units
7.2 Rules for connecting S5 expansion units
Introduction
When you connect S5 expansion units to an S7-400 via the IM 463-2, there are rules to observe
with regard to cable length, maximum expansion, use of a terminating connector and
permissible potential differences.
Cable length
The maximum cable length per IM 463-2 from the CR of the S7-400 to the last S5 expansion unit
is 600 m. You set the actual cable length at the IM 463-2.
Maximum configuration
You can use up to four IM 463-2s in one S7-400 CR.
At each IM 463-2 interface (C1 and C2), you can connect up to four S5 expansion units in a
distributed configuration.
You can connect further EUs centrally to the EUs connected in the distributed configuration.
Addressing of the S5 modules

All S5 address areas are available (P, Q, IM3, IM4)
Note
Note that every S5 address can only be used once, even across different lines.
Terminator
You must terminate the IM 314 of the last EU in each line with the 6ES5760-1AA11 terminating
connector.
Permissible potential differences

For the safe functioning of the distributed configuration, you must ensure that the potential
difference between two devices is not more than 7 V. Use an equipotential bonding conductor.
See also
Operator controls and indicators (Page 318)

Introduction
All controls and indicators on the IM 463-2 are arranged on the front plate. The following figure
shows the arrangement of the controls and indicators.
IM 463-2
X
463-2AA..-....
EXTF
LEDs EXTF, C1, C 2
OFF
Interface Selector Switch Interface selector switch
Cable Length Selector Selector Cable length selector switch
X1 connector
Interface C1
X2 connector
Interface C2
Figure 7-1 Layout of the controls and indicators of the IM 463-2

LEDs
Table 7-1 LEDs of the IM 463-2
LED Meaning
EXTF LED (red) Lights up in the event of an external fault. Line 1 or line 2 has a fault
(power supply failed in the EU; terminating connector missing; wire break, or inter‐
face selector switch wrongly set).
Interface selector switch
Table 7-2 Switch position: Interface selector of the IM 463-2
Switch setting Meaning

C1 ON You use only interface C1.
C2 ON You use only interface C2.
C1, C2 ON You use both interfaces.
C1, C2 OFF You use neither of the two interfaces.
You do not want to operate an S5 EU at present.
Cable length selector switch
Table 7-3 Switch position: Cable length selector of the IM 463-2
Switch setting Meaning

100 Cable length 1 to 100 m
WARNING
Danger of data loss.
Changing the setting of the interface selector switch and the cable length selector switch in
RUN mode can result in loss of data.
Change the settings of these switches only in STOP mode of the CPU.

7.4 Installing and connecting the IM 463-2
Overview
To install an IM 463-2 in a CR of the S7-400, proceed in the same way as when installing other
S7-400 modules (see Installation manual).
To connect an IM 463-2, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Prepare the cable
2. Plug in the cable
3. Select the interface
4. Select the cable length
Prepare the cable

You can use the cable 721. However, you must change the connector housing on the connection
side of the IM 463-2.
Two connector housings are enclosed with every IM 463-2. You can prepare a cable for an IM
463-2 using one of these connector housings and a 721 cable (see Catalog ST 54.1). Proceed
as follows:
1. Remove one connector housing on the 721 cable.
2. Open one of the connector housings enclosed with the IM 463-2.
3. Attach this connector housing to the 721 cable.
4. Close the connector housing.
Plug in the cable

To plug in the cable, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Open the cover of the IM 463-2.
2. Plug the new connector of the cable into one of the connectors of the IM 463-2.
Interface C1 corresponds to the upper connector;
Interface C2 corresponds to the lower connector.
3. Screw the connector of the cable onto the connector of the IM 463-2.
4. Close the cover.
Select the interface

You select the interface with the selector switch on the front plate. Set the interface(s) here that
you want to use. Make the settings on the IM 463-2 only when the CPU is in STOP mode.

Select the cable length

You select the cable length with the selector switch on the front plate. Set the range
corresponding to the line length. Make the settings on the IM 463-2 only when the CPU is in STOP
mode.

7.5 Setting the operating modes of the IM 314
Introduction
To operate the IM 463-2, you must set on the IM 314 the S5 expansion unit used and the address
area of the S5 I/O modules.

Setting the S5 expansion unit

You set the S5 expansion unit in which you want to use the IM 314 using jumpers BR1, BR2, and
BR3 on the IM 314. The following figure shows where these jumpers are located on the IM 314
and which setting corresponds to which expansion unit.
Table 7-4 Settings of the IM 314 using expansion units
Used in EU 185U, EU 186U

4321 4321 off
S1 on
BR 1 BR 2
X3 X1
4321
BR 3
X4 X2
4321 4321
Used in EU 183 U
S1 off
on
BR 1 BR 2
X3 4321 X1
BR 3
X4 X2

Used in ER 701-2, ER 701-3

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 S1 off
on
BR 1 BR 2
X3 X1
4321
BR 3
X4 X2
Setting the address area

The address area of the S5 I/O modules is set on the IM 314. This setting applies only for the
digital and analog I/O modules.
The address areas P, Q, IM3, and IM4 are available. Set the switch to the relevant position to
address the digital and analog I/O modules in these areas.
Table 7-5 Settings address areas on the IM 314
I/O area address Switch position

O = OFF, 1 = ON The first two switches on the left are
P area: F000 - F0FF S1: 0000 * not relevant.
Q area: F100 - F1FF 0001
IM3 area: FC00 - FCFF 1100
OFF
IM4 area: FD00 - FDFF 1101
ON
* Factory state

7.6 Configuring S5 modules for operation in the S7-400
Example
You program S5 modules in STEP 7. Refer to the description in the STEP 7 manual or the online
help to learn how this is done.
The following figure shows a possible connection of CRs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and IM
314.

Further EU 184U,
EU 187U (central)
S5- S5- S5-

Expansion IM 312-3 Expansion IM 312-3 Expansion IM 312-5
rack rack rack
IM 314 IM 314 IM 314
S5- S5- S5-

Expansion IM 300-3 Expansion IM 300-3 Expansion IM 300-5
rack rack rack
Terminating connector 760-1AA11
All 721 connecting cables
S5- S5-
Expansion IM 312-3 Expansion IM 312-5
rack rack
Central
mounting rack IM 314 IM 314
S7-400 S5- S5-

IM 463-2 Expansion IM 300-3 Expansion IM 300-5
rack rack
Terminating connector 760-1AA11
All 721 connecting cables

} To further S5 expansion units (distributed)
(max. 4 per IM 463-2)
max. 600 m
Figure 7-2 Connection variant for CCs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and IM 314

7.7 Pin assignments of the 721 cable
Pin assignments of the 721 cable
Table 7-6 Pin assignments of the 721 cable
34 50 17 1
1 17 50 34
Connector Bundle ID sheath Identification foil Core color Connector

50-pin Contact 50-pin Contact
20 white 20
21 brown 21
4 green 4
5 1 yellow 5
18 No. 16 Red gray 18
19 pink 19
2 blue 2
3 red 3
24 white 24
25 brown 25
8 green 8
9 2 yellow 9
22 No. 17 green gray 22
23 pink 23
6 blue 6
7 red 7
26 white 26
27 brown 27
10 green 10
11 3 yellow 11
42 No. 18 yellow gray 42
43 pink 43
44 blue 44
45 red 45
28 white 28
29 brown 29
12 green 12
13 4 yellow 13
46 No. 19 brown gray 46
47 pink 47
30 blue 30
31 red 31

34 white 34
35 brown 35
36 5 green 36
37 No. 20 black yellow 37
38 gray 38
39 pink 39
40 blue 40
41 red 41
48 white 48
49 brown 49
14 6 green 14
15 No. 21 blue yellow 15
32 gray 32
33 pink 33
- Shield -

7.8 Terminating connector for IM 314
Introduction
The IM 314 of the last expansion unit of each line is terminated with the 6ES5 760-1AA11
terminating connector.
Table 7-7 Assignment of the terminator 760-1AA11
Assignment of the terminator 760-1AA11
1 17
34 50
Plug connection 180-Ohm resistance or jumper Plug connection

28 8
29 9
26 6
27 7
46 4
47 5
44 2
45 3
42 24
43 25
38 1
22
39 23
34 1
20
35 21
36 1
18
37 19

Assignment of the terminator 760-1AA11

40 1
12
41 13
48 2
10
49 11
15 30
16 31
14
50
1
100 Ω
2
200Ω

7.9 Specifications IM463-2 (6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0)
Article number 6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0

Input current
Power loss
Power loss, max. 6 600 mW
Cable length between first and last interface 600 m
module, max.
Dimensions
Width 25 mm
Height 290 mm
Depth 217 mm
Weights


Parameter sets of signal modules A
A.1 How to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user
program
Parameter assignment in the user program

You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7.
In the user program, you can use an SFC:
• To assign new parameters to the module
• To transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed signal module
Parameters stored in data records

The signal module parameters are stored in data records 0 and 1.
Modifiable parameters
You can edit the parameters of data record 1, and then transfer these to the signal module using
SFC55. The CPU parameters are not changed by this action!
You cannot modify any parameters of data record 0 in the user program.
SFCs for parameter assignment

SFCs available for programming signal modules in the user program:
Table A-1 SFCs for assigning parameters to signal modules
SFC No. Identifier Application

55 WR_PARM Transfer modifiable parameters (data record 1) to the addressed
signal module.
56 WR_DPARM Transfer parameters (data record 0 or 1) from the CPU to the ad‐
dressed signal module.
57 PARM_MOD Transfer all parameters (data record 0 and 1) from the CPU to the
addressed signal module.

Parameter sets of signal modules
A.1 How to assign the parameters for signal modules in the user program
Description of the parameters

The next chapters describe all modifiable parameters of the various module classes. The
parameters of the signal modules are described:
• In the online help of STEP 7
• In this reference manual
The sections dealing with the various signal modules also show you the corresponding
configurable parameters.
Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of assigning parameters to signal modules in the user
program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found in the STEP
7 manuals.

A.2 Parameters of digital input modules
Parameters
The table below lists the parameters you can set for digital input modules.
The comparison illustrates the parameters you can edit:
• In STEP 7
• Using SFC 55 "WR_PARM"
The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module
(refer to the STEP 7 manuals).
Table A-2 Parameters of digital input modules
Parameters Data re‐ Parameter assign‐ Parameter assign‐

cord num‐ ment with SFC 55 ment with STEP 7
ber
Destination CPU for interrupt No Yes
Input delay 0 No Yes
Diagnostics No Yes
Hardware interrupt enable Yes Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Reaction to error* Yes Yes
Hardware interrupt at positive edge Yes Yes
Hardware interrupt at negative edge Yes Yes
Enable substitute value "1"* Yes Yes
* Only for 6ES7 421-7BH0x-0AB0
Note
If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must
enable the diagnostics in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7.
Structure of data record 1

A data record consists of several bytes, the bits of which can be active or inactive:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Figure A-1 For example, byte 1 with the bits 0 - 7
The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 0, 1, 2 and 3) for the parameters
of digital input modules.

You enable a parameter by setting a logical "1" at the corresponding bit.
Table A-3 Data record 1 for parameters of digital input modules
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 0 7 Hardware interrupt enable
6 Diagnostics interrupt enable
0 Reaction to error1
Byte 1 7 On rising edge at channel 7
Hardware inter‐ 6 On rising edge at channel 6
rupt 5 On rising edge at channel 5
4 On rising edge at channel 4
Byte 2 7 On rising edge at channel 15
Hardware inter‐ 6 On rising edge at channel 14
rupt 5 On rising edge at channel 13
Byte 3 7 On falling edge at channel 7
Hardware inter‐ 6 On falling edge at channel 6
rupt 5 On falling edge at channel 5
4 On falling edge at channel 4
1
Only for 6ES7 421-7BH0x-0AB0
The following table shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 4, 5, and 6) for the
parameters of digital input modules.

Table A-4 Data record 1 for parameters of digital input modules
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 On falling edge at channel 15
Byte 5 7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7
Substitute value1 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6
5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5
Substitute value1 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14
1
Only for 6ES7 421-7BH0x-0AB0

A.3 Parameters of digital output modules
Parameters
The table below contains all parameters you can set for digital output modules. The comparison
shows:
• Which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and
• Which parameters you can change using SFC 55 "WR_PARM".
Table A-5 Parameters of the digital output modules
Parameters Data re‐ Parameter assignment Parameter assignment

cord no. with SFC 55 with STEP 7
Destination CPU for interrupt 0 No Yes
Diagnostics No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable Yes Yes
Reaction to CPU STOP 1 Yes Yes
Enable substitute value "1"* Yes Yes
Note

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 0, 1 and 2) for the parameters of
digital output modules.

Table A-6 Data record 1 for parameters of digital output modules
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 0 7
6 Diagnostics interrupt enable
5
4
3
2
1
0 Reaction to CPU STOP
Substitute 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6
value 5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5
The following table shows the structure of data record 1 (bytes 3, and 4) for the parameters
of digital output modules.
Table A-7 Data record 1 for parameters of digital output modules
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 3* 7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 23

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4* 7 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 31
* Bytes 3 and 4 are not relevant for SM 421;DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5A

A.4 Parameters of analog input modules
Parameters
The table below lists all parameters you can set for analog input modules.
The comparison illustrates the parameters you can edit:
• In STEP 7
• Using SFC 55 "WR_PARM"
Table A-8 Parameters of analog input modules
Parameters Data re‐ Parameter assignment Parameter assignment

cord no. with SFC 55 with STEP 7
Destination CPU for interrupt No Yes
Measuring method No Yes
Measuring range No Yes
Diagnostics No Yes
Temperature unit 0 No Yes
Temperature coefficient No Yes
Noise suppression No Yes
Smoothing No Yes
Reference junction No Yes
End of cycle interrupt No Yes
Diagnostics interrupt enable 1 Yes Yes
Hardware interrupt enable Yes Yes
Reference temperature 1 Yes Yes
High limit 1 Yes Yes
Low limit 1 Yes Yes
Note

The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of analog input
modules.

7 6 0
Byte 0
Diagnostics interrupt enable

Hardware interrupt enable
Byte 1 high byte Reference Temperature

Byte 2 low byte in 0,01 °C
Byte 3 high byte High limit
Byte 4 low byte Channel 0
Byte 5 high byte Low limit
•
•
•
•
•
•
Figure A-2 Data record 1 for the parameters of analog input modules
Note
The representation of limits and the reference temperature corresponds to the analog value
representation. Observe range limits when setting the limit values.

Diagnostic data of signal modules B
B.1 Evaluating diagnostic data of signal modules in the user program
This section
This section describes the diagnostic data structure in system data. You must be familiar with
this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the signal module in the STEP
7 user program.
Diagnostic data stored in data records

Module diagnostic data may have a length of max. 43 bytes, and are contained in data records
0 and 1:
• Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the current state of an
automation system.
• Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained in data record
0 and as many as 39 bytes of module specific diagnostic data.
Further references
An in-depth description of the principle of evaluating the diagnostic data of signal modules in
the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found
in the STEP 7 manuals.

Diagnostic data of signal modules
B.2 Structure and contents of diagnostic data bytes 0 and 1
B.2 Structure and contents of diagnostic data bytes 0 and 1
Overview
The section below describes the structure and content of the various bytes in diagnostic data.
General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to "1".
Bytes 0 and 1
Table B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of diagnostic data
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 0 7 Incorrect parameter in the module
6 No module parameters
5 Front connector missing
4 External auxiliary voltage missing
3 Channel error
2 External error
1 Internal error
0 Module error
Byte 1 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 Channel information available
3
2 Module type (see table "Codes of the module types")
1
0
Module types
The table below lists the module type IDs (bits 0 to 3 in byte 1).
Table B-2 Codes of the module types
ID Module type
0101 Analog module
0110 CPU
1000 Function module
1100 CP
1111 Digital module

B.3 Diagnostic data of the digital input modules as of byte 2
Overview
The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for special digital input
modules are described below. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to "1".
You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section
"Diagnostics of the modules".
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Table B-3 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 Module-internal supply voltage failure
3 0
2 Operating mode 0: RUN; 1: STOP
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 Hardware interrupt lost
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0
Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Table B-4 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#70: Digital input
5
4
3
2
1
0

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 5 7 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long
0
Byte 6 7 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 16 channels
0
Byte 7 5 Channel error 7
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0
6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8

Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 9 to 24. The figure
below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.
Table B-5 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 9 - 24 7 0
6 0
5 Sensor supply missing
4 Wire break
3 0
2 0
1 0
0 Configuring/parameter assignment error
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Table B-6 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Table B-7 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#70: Digital input
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

Byte Bit Meaning

6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8
Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 421; DI 16 x UC 24/60 V

Table B-8 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x DC 24 V
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 9-24 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 Wire break
3 0
2 0
1 0

B.4 Diagnostic data of the digital output modules as of byte 2
Overview
The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for special digital output
modules are described below. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to "1".
You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section on
the special module.
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Table B-9 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0
Table B-10 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#72: digital output
5
4
3
2
1
0

Byte Bit Meaning

0
0
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0
6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8


Table B-11 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 9 - 24 7 0
6 External load voltage missing
5 0
4 0
3 Short-circuit to M
2 0
1 0
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Table B-12 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 Module-internal supply voltage failure
3 0
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

Bytes 4 to 10 of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Table B-13 Bytes 4 to 10 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

Byte Bit Meaning

6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8
6 Channel error 22
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 17
0 Channel error 16
6 Channel error 30
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 25
0 Channel error 24
Bytes 11 to 42 of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A

Data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data, starting at bytes 11 to 42. The
figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the module.
Table B-14 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 11 - 42 7 0
6 External load voltage missing
5 0
4 Wire break
2 Short-circuit to L+
1 0

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Table B-15 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
1 0
0 0
Byte 3 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0
Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Table B-16 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
5
4
3
2
1
0

Byte Bit Meaning

0
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0
6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8
Bytes 9 to 24 of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A

Table B-17 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A
Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 9 - 24 7 0
6 0
5 Fuse blown
4 0
3 0
2 0
1 0

B.5 Diagnostic data of the analog input modules as of byte 2
Overview
The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for the special analog
input modules are described below. General rule: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set
to "1".
You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section on
the special module.
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit
Table B-18 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
1 0
0 Measuring range module incorrect or missing
Byte 3 7 0
5 0
4 ADC/DAC error
3 RAM error
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0

Bytes 4 to 8 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit
Table B-19 Bytes 4 to 8 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
6 Channel type B#16#71: Analog input
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

Byte Bit Meaning

6 Channel error 14
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 9
0 Channel error 8

Table B-20 Diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 9-24 7 Overflow
6 Underflow
5 Reference channel error
4 Wire break
2 0
1 0
Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
Table B-21 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
1 0
0 0

Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 3 7 0
5 0
4 ADC/DAC error
3 0
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0
Table B-22 Bytes 4 to 7 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0

Byte Bit Meaning

6 Channel error 6
5 ...
4 ...
3 ...
2 ...
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

following table shows the assignment of the even diagnostic bytes (bytes 8, 10, to 22) for a
channel of the module.
Table B-23 Even diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8-23 7 Overflow
even 6 Underflow
5 0
4 Wire break
3 0
2 0
1 0
The following table shows the assignment of the odd diagnostic bytes (bytes 9, 11, to 23) for
a channel of the module.
Table B-24 Odd diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8-23 7 User calibration does not correspond to the parameter assignment
odd 6 Open conductor in the current source
5 0
4 Underrange or overrange
3 Run time calibration error
2 Open conductor in - direction
1 Open conductor in + direction
0 User connection not wired

Bytes 2 and 3 of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit
Table B-25 Bytes 2 and 3 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 2 7 0
6 0
5 0
4 0
3 0
1 0
0 Thermocouple connection error
Byte 3 7 0
5 0
4 ADC/DAC error
3 RAM error
2 EPROM error
1 0
0 0
Table B-26 Bytes 4 to 7 of the diagnostic data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 4 7 0
5
4
3
2
1
0

Byte Bit Meaning

0
6 Channel error 6
5 ......
4 ......
3 ......
2 ......
1 Channel error 1
0 Channel error 0

following table shows the assignment of the even diagnostic bytes (bytes 8, 10, to 22) for a
channel of the module.
Table B-27 Even diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Bytes 8-23 7 Overflow
even 6 Underflow
5 Reference channel error
4 Wire break
3 0
2 0
1 0

The following table shows the assignment of the odd diagnostic bytes (bytes 9, 11, to 23) for
a channel of the module.
Table B-28 Odd diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 bit
Byte Bit Meaning

Byte 8-23 7 User calibration does not correspond to the parameter assignment
odd 6 0
5 0
4 0
3 Runtime calibration error
2 0
1 0
0 0

Accessories and spare parts C
C.1 Accessories and spare parts
Accessories and spare parts
Accessories - spare parts Order number

For racks
Number wheel for slot labeling C79165-Z1523-A22
Spare slot covers (qty 10) 6ES7490-1AA00-0AA0
Application module FM458-1 DP 6DD1607-0AA2
EXM 438-1 I/O extension 6DD1607-0CA1
EXM 448-2 Communication extension 6DD1607-0EA2
For power supplies
Spare connector for PS 405 (DC) 6ES7490-0A00-0AA0
Spare connector for PS 407 (AC) 6ES7490-0AB00-0AA0
Backup battery 6ES7971-0BA00
For digital modules/analog modules
Cover foil (10 x) for labeling strips of the SMs 6ES7492-2XX00-0AA0
Cover flap for fuse receptacle on the AC modules 6ES7422-0XX00-7AA0
Measuring range module for analog modules 6ES7974-0AA00-0AA0
Front connector screw-type connection 6ES7492-1AL00-0AA0
Front connector spring connection 6ES7492-1BL00-0AA0
Front connector crimp connection 6ES7492-1CL00-0AA0
Panel for front connector, 5 pieces 6ES7492-2XL00-0AA0
Crimping tool for crimp contacts 6XX3 071
Crimp contacts (package of 250) 6XX3 070
Fuses, 8 A, quick blow
• Wickmann 194-1800-0
• Schurter SP001.1013
• Littelfuse 217.008
Labeling sheet for the front connector, petrol blue 6ES7492-2AX00-0AA0
Labeling sheet for the front connector, light 6ES7492-2BX00-0AA0
Labeling sheet for the front connector, yellow 6ES7492-2CX00-0AA0
Labeling sheet for the front connector, red 6ES7492-2DX00-0AA0
For IMs
Terminator for IM 461–0 6ES7461-0AA00-7AA0
Terminator for IM 461–3 6ES7461-3AA00-7AA0
IM 463-, send IM, 600 m to IM 314 of the S5 6ES7463-2AA00-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 0,75 m 6ES7468-1AH50-0AA0

Accessories and spare parts
C.1 Accessories and spare parts
Accessories - spare parts Order number

IM cable with communication bus, 1.5 m 6ES7468-1BB50-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 5 m 6ES7468-1BF00-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 10 m 6ES7468-1CB00-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 25 m 6ES7468-1CC50-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 50 m 6ES7468-1CF00-0AA0
IM cable with communication bus, 100 m 6ES7468-1DB00-0AA0
IM cable with current transmission, 0,75 m 6ES7468-3AH50-0AA0
IM cable with current transmission, 1.5 m 6ES7468-3BB50-0AA0
Package with plug adapters for IM 467 FO 6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0
Package with simplex plugs and polishing set for IM 467 FO 6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0
For interfacing / networking
Standard mounting rail 35 mm 6ES5710-8MA...
PROFIBUS 6XV1830-3BH10
PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket 6ES7972-0BB10-0XA0
PROFIBUS bus connector without PG socket, with angled cable outlet 6ES7972-0BA40-0X40
PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket, with angled cable outlet 6ES7972-0BB40-0X40
PROFIBUS RS 485 bus terminal 6GK1500-0AB00
6GK1500-0DA00
PC/MPI cable (5 m) 6ES7901-2BF00-0AA0
Cabinets
Cabinet 2200 x 800 x 400 with extension set for SIMATIC S7- 8MC 2281-7FC11-8DA1
Extension set for SIMATIC S7- 8MC 1605–BS70–AA0
Cables for printers with
Connector housing, gray
• 9-pin V42254-A6000-G109
• 15-pin V42254-A6000-G115
• 25-pin V42254-A6000-G125
Connector housing, black
• 9-pin V42254-A6001-G309
• 15-pin V42254-A6001-G315
• 25-pin V42254-A6001-G325

Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive
devices (ESD) D
D.1 ESD: What are the directives for handling electrostatic sensitive
devices?
Definition
All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to their
design, these electronic components are highly sensitive to overvoltage, and thus to any
electrostatic discharge.
These Electrostatic Sensitive Devices/Modules are commonly abbreviated ESD.
Electrostatic sensitive devices are labeled with the following symbol:
CAUTION
Electrostatic sensitive devices can be destroyed by voltages far below the level perceived by
human beings. These voltages are generated when you touch a component or electrical
connections of a module without having discharged your body. In most cases, the damage
caused by overvoltage is not evident immediately, and results in damage only after a prolonged
period of operation.

Directive on handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)
D.2 Electrostatic charging of persons
D.2 Electrostatic charging of persons
Electrostatic charging
Any person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its surroundings may
be exposed to electrostatic charge.
The figure shows the maximum electrostatic voltage which may build up on a person
coming into contact with the materials indicated. These values are in conformity with the
specifications of IEC 61000-4-2.
1
(kV)
16
15
14
13
12 2
11
10
9
3
8
7
4
6
5
4
3
2
1
5
5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Figure D-1 Electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person

(1) Voltage in kV
(2) Synthetic material
(3) Wool
(4) Antistatic materials, such as wood or concrete
(5) Relative air humidity in %

D.3 Basic protective measures against electrostatic discharge
Ensure sufficient grounding

Make sure all persons, workplaces and packaging are sufficiently grounded when ESD
components are being handled. This prevents electrostatic charging.
Avoid direct contact

You should only touch ESD components if this is unavoidable (for example, during maintenance
work). Handle the modules without touching any chip pins or PCB traces. In this way, the
discharged energy can not affect the sensitive devices.
Discharge your body before you start taking any measurements on a module. Do so by
touching grounded metallic parts. Always use grounded measuring instruments.


List of abbreviations E
E.1 List of abbreviations
List of abbreviations
Abbreviations Explanations
AC Alternating current
ADC Analog-to-digital converter
AI Analog input
AO Analog output
AS Automation system
STL Statement list (type of representation in STEP 7)
BAF Battery failure
BUS1F; BUS2F LED bus failure on the MPI/PROFIBUS DP interface 1 or 2
CH Channel
COMP Compensation circuit
CP Communications processor
CPU Central processing unit of the PLC
CR Central rack
DAC Digital-to-analog converter
DB Data block
DC Direct current
DI Digital input
DO Digital output
ESD Electrostatic sensitive device
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
EPROM Erasable programmable read-only memory
ER Expansion rack
ID Input delay
SV Set substitution value
EXM Extension module
EXTF Error LED "external fault"
FB Function block
FC Function
FEPROM Flash erasable programmable read-only memory
FM Function module
FRCE Fiber-optic cable
FC Function block diagram

GD Global data communication
ES Sensor supply
IC Constant-current line
IFM1F; IFM2F LED error at interface module 1/2
IM Interface module
INTF Error LED "internal fault"
IP Intelligent I/O
L+ Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage
HLV KLV
FOC Fiber-optic cable
LAD Ladder logic diagram
M Chassis ground
MANA Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit
MPI Multipoint interface
MRES Master reset position of the toggle switch for general reset of the CPU
MSTR Master
OB Organization block
OP Operator panel
OS Operator system
PIO Process image of outputs
PII Process image of inputs
PG Programming device
PS Power supply
QI: Analog output current
RAM Random access memory
REDF Redundancy fault
R L: Load impedance
S+ Sensing line (positive)
S- Sensing line (negative)
SCL Structured control language
SFB System function block
SFC System function
SM Signal module
PLC Programmable logic controller
SSL Signal module
TD HMI (text display)
SSL Transducer
UC Universal current
TD Universal rack
UCM Common mode voltage

Uiso Potential difference between MANA and local ground
USR User
Vs Sensor voltage
Sign Sign
CR Central rack


Glossary
2/3/4-wire connection
Type of connection to the module, e.g. from resistance thermometers/ resistors to the front
connector of the analog input module or from loads to the voltage output of an analog
output module.
2-wire transducer/4-wire transducer

Type of transducer (2-wire transducer: supply via connection terminals of the
analog input module; 4-wire transducer: supply via separate connections of the transducer)
Address
An address identifies a certain operand or operand range, examples: input I 12.1; memory
word MW 25; data block DB 3.
Automation system
An automation system is a → programmable logic controller consisting of a → central rack, a
CPU and various input/output modules.
Backplane bus
The backplane bus is a serial data bus over which modules communicate with each other and
are supplied with the necessary voltage. The connection between the modules is established
by bus connectors.
Backup battery
The backup battery ensures that the → user program in the → CPU is not lost in the event of
a power failure and that defined data areas, bit memory, timers and counters are → stored
retentively.
Backup voltage, external

The same backup as with a backup battery can be achieved if a backup voltage (DC voltage
between 5 V and 15 V) is applied to the "EXT. BATT." socket of the CPU.
The external backup voltage is required to replace a power supply module if the user
program and data stored in a RAM (e.g. bit memory, timers, counters, system data,
integrated clock) need to be backed up for the duration of the module replacement.

Glossary
Basic error limit

The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 °C in relation to the nominal range of the
analog module.
Baud rate
Data transmission speed (bps)
Central rack
An S7-400 consists of a central rack to which expansion racks can be assigned if required.
The central rack is the rack that contains the → CPU.
Cold restart
→ Restart of the automation system and its user program after all dynamic data (variables
of the input/output image, internal registers, timers, counters, etc. and associated program
sections) have been reset to a predefined value.
A cold restart can be triggered automatically (for example, after a power failure, a loss of
information in dynamic memory areas, etc.).
Common mode voltage

Voltage that is common to all terminals of a group and that is measured between this group
and any reference point (usually ground).
Communication load
Load on cyclic program execution of a CPU caused by communication processes (PROFIBUS
DP).
To prevent communication processes from putting too much load on cyclic program
execution, the maximum permissible cycle load caused by communication can be defined
via parameter assignment in STEP 7.
Communications processor
Programmable module for communication tasks, such as networking, point-to-point
connection.
Compensating box
Compensating boxes can be used when measuring temperatures with thermocouples
connected to analog input modules. The compensating box is a compensation circuit for
compensating temperature fluctuations at the → reference junction.

Glossary
Constant bus cycle time

"Constant bus cycle time" means a DP bus cycle accurate to a few microseconds that can be
configured in STEP 7.
CP
→ Communications processor
Data block
Data blocks (DB) are data areas in the user program that contain user data. There are global
data blocks that can be accessed by all logic blocks and there are instance data blocks that
are assigned to a specific FB call.
Declaration
Definition of variables (e.g. parameters or local data of a block) with name, data type,
comment, etc.
Default setting
The default setting is a practical basic setting that is always used if no other value is entered.
Destruction limit
Limit of the permissible input voltage/current. If this limit is exceeded, then the
measurement accuracy may deteriorate. If the destruction limit is exceeded significantly,
the internal measuring circuitry may be destroyed.
Diagnostic buffer
The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU where diagnostic events are
stored in order of occurrence.
For troubleshooting purposes, the user can read out the exact cause of the error from the
diagnostic buffer with STEP 7 (PLC -> Module information menu command).
Diagnostic data
All diagnostic events that have occurred are collected in the CPU and entered in the →
diagnostic buffer. If error OB exists, it is started.
Modules with diagnostic capability signal detected system errors to the → CPU using
diagnostic interrupts. The operating system of the CPU calls OB 82 when a diagnostic
interrupt occurs.

Glossary
Diagnostics
Generic term for → system diagnostics, process fault diagnostics and user-defined
diagnostics.
Direct data exchange

Direct data exchange In direct data exchange, local input address areas of an intelligent DP
device (e.g. CPU 315-2 with PROFIBUS DP connection) or a DP master are assigned to the
input address areas of a PROFIBUS DP partner. The intelligent DP device or DP master receives
the input data that the PROFIBUS DP partner sends to its DP master via these assigned input
address areas.
DP device
A device that is operated on PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS DP protocol is called a DP device.
DP master
A station with master functionality in PROFIBUS DP. A master that operates in conformance
with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 with the DP protocol is a DP master. The token allowing
access to the bus is exclusively passed on among the masters. The devices, in this case DP
devices, can only react when requested by a master. A distinction must be made between the
following:
DP master (class 1): handles user data exchange with the DP devices assigned to it.
DP master (class 2): provides services such as: reading input/output data, diagnostics, global
control.
Equipotential bonding
Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that brings exposed conductive
parts of electrical equipment and external conductive parts to the same or almost the same
potential to prevent interfering or dangerous voltages between these parts.
FB
→ Function block
FC
→ Function
Fiber-optic cable
A fiber-optic cable is a transmission medium made of glass fiber or plastic. Fiber-optic cables
are insensitive to electromagnetic interference and allow high data transmission rates.

Glossary
Floating
In floating input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuits are
galvanically isolated; e.g. by optocoupler, relay contact, or transformer. Input/output circuits
can be connected to a common potential.
Force
The "Force" function overwrites a variable (e.g. bit memory, output) with a value defined by
the user.
At the same time, the variable is write-protected so that the value cannot be changed from
any other location (thus, also not from the user program). This value is retained even after
the programming device has been disconnected.
Only when the "Unforce" function is called is the write protection removed and the variable
written again with the value specified by the user program.
The "Force" function can be used, for example, during commissioning to set specific outputs
to "ON" state for any length of time even if the logic operations in the user program are not
fulfilled (e.g. due to missing wiring of inputs).
FREEZE
Control command, inputs of the → DP devices are frozen at the current value.
Function
According to IEC 1131-3, a function (FC) is a → logic block without → static data. A function
allows parameters to be passed in the user program. This makes it suitable for programming
frequently recurring complex functions such as calculations.
Function block
According to IEC 1131-3, a function block (FB) is a → logic block with → static data. An FB
has "memory" so that it is possible to access its parameters (for example, outputs) from any
part of the user program.
Functional grounding
Grounding with the sole purpose of ensuring the intended function of the electrical
equipment. The functional grounding short-circuits interference voltages that would
otherwise lead to impermissible influences on the equipment.
Fuse blown
Parameter in STEP 7 for digital output modules. When the parameter is enabled, the blowing
of one or more fuses is detected by the module. If the parameter is set accordingly, a →
diagnostic interrupt is triggered.

Glossary
Grounding
Grounding means connecting an electrically conductive part to the ground electrode (one or
more conductive parts that make good contact with the ground) via a grounding system.
Hardware interrupt
A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules due to a certain event in
the process (violation of the high or low limit; module has completed the cyclic conversion of
its channels).
The hardware interrupt is signaled to the CPU. In keeping with the priority of this interrupt,
the assigned → organization block is then executed.
Hot restart
When a CPU starts up (e.g. through operation of the mode selector or after power ON),
either OB101 (hot restart), OB100 (warm restart) or OB102 (cold restart) is executed before
the cyclic program execution (OB1). Backup of the CPU is essential for the "hot restart".
The following applies: All data areas (timers, counters, bit memory, data blocks) and their
contents are retained. The → process image input is read and execution of the STEP 7 user
program is continued from the point at which it was last stopped (STOP, power OFF).
The other startup modes available are → cold restart and → warm restart.
I/O bus
Part of the → backplane bus in the automation system, optimized for fast exchange of signals
between the CPU(s) and the signal modules.
User data (e.g. digital input signals of a signal module) and system data (e.g. default
parameter data records of a signal module) are transferred via the I/O bus.
Input delay
Parameter in STEP 7 for digital input modules. The input delay is used to suppress coupled
interference. Interference pulses from 0 ms up to the set input delay are suppressed.
The set input delay is subject to a tolerance that can be found in the technical specifications
of the module. A high input delay suppresses longer interference pulses, a low input delay
suppresses shorter interference pulses.
The permissible input delay depends on the cable length between the sensor and module.
For example, a high input delay must be set for long, unshielded supply lines to the sensor
(over 100 m).
Integration time
The integration time is the inverse value of the → interference frequency suppression in ms.

Glossary
Interference frequency suppression

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The frequency of the alternating voltage
supply system may interfere with the measured value, in particular when measuring withing
small voltage ranges and with thermocouples. With this parameter, the user specifies the
predominant line frequency in the system.
Interrupt
SIMATIC S7 recognizes 28 different priority classes that control the processing of the
user program. These priority classes include interrupts, e.g. hardware interrupts. When an
interrupt occurs, the operating system automatically calls an assigned organization block in
which the user can program the desired reaction (e.g. in an FB).
Interrupt reaction time

The interrupt reaction time is the time from the first occurrence of an interrupt signal to
the call of the first instruction in the interrupt OB. General rule: Higher priority interrupts
are handled first. This means that the interrupt reaction time is extended by the program
execution time of the higher-priority interrupt OBs and interrupt OBs with the same priority
that occurred earlier but not yet been processed (queue).
Keep last valid value (KLV)

Module retains the last value output before the STOP state.
Linearity error
The linearity error indicates the maximum deviation of the measured/output value from the
ideal linear relationship between measured/output signal and digital value. It is specified as a
percentage in relation to the nominal range of the analog module.
Load memory
The load memory is part of a programmable module (CPU, CP). It contains objects generated
by the programming device (load objects). It is implemented either as a plug-in memory card
or as permanently integrated memory.
Local data
Local data is the data assigned to a → logic block that is declared in its → declaration
section or its variable declaration. It includes (block-specific): formal parameters, → static
data, → temporary data.
Measuring principle, instantaneous value encoding

A module with instantaneous value encoding is always used for very fast measurements
or for variables that change very quickly. With this method, the module accesses the
variable to be measured as quickly as possible and returns an instantaneous recording

Glossary
of the signal at a specific time. Note that this measuring method makes modules "more
sensitive" than modules using the integrating measuring method. Therefore, interference in
the measurement signal may result in false values. When using these modules, you must
ensure a "clean" measurement signal, e.g. by strictly adhering to the installation guidelines.
Measuring principle, integrating

A module with integrating measuring method is always used for measurements that are not
time-critical. The integration time is inversely proportional to the line frequency. You set the
line frequency in STEP 7 - this then results in the integration time. With a line frequency of
50 Hz, the integration time is 20 ms or even multiples thereof. Since the measured value is
integrated over exactly this period, at least one or more whole periods of the line frequency
that may be superimposed on the measured signal are always included. The mean value
of the interference is thus integrated to zero (positive component of the first half period =
negative component of the second half period) and, as a result of the principle, only the
useful signal is detected.
Measuring range module

Measuring range modules are plugged onto the analog input modules to adapt them to
various measuring ranges.
Memory reset
The following memories of the CPU are erased during a memory reset: work memory, read/
write area of the load memory, system memory.
The MPI parameters and the diagnostic buffer are preserved.
Mode selector
The mode selector allows the user to set the current mode of the CPU (RUN, STOP) or to reset
the memory of the CPU (MRES).
Non-isolated
In non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load
circuits are electrically connected.
Operating mode
Operating mode means:
1. The operating state of the CPU as selected with the mode selector or PG
2. The mode of program execution in the CPU

Glossary
Operating state
The automation systems of SIMATIC S7 recognize the following operating states: STOP, →
STARTUP, RUN and HOLD.
Operational limit
The operational limit is the measurement or output error of the analog module across the
entire temperature range in relation to the nominal range of the analog module.
Parameter
1. Variable of a → logic block
2. Variable for setting the properties of a module (one or more per module). When shipped,
every module has practical basic parameter settings, which the user can change in STEP 7.
Point-to-point connection
In a point-to-point connection, only two stations are physically connected to each other. This
type of communication connection is used when the use of a communication network is
not practical or, for example, when different types of partners are connected (e.g. PLC with
process computer).
Priority class
The S7-CPU operating system provides up to 28 priority classes (= program execution levels),
e.g. for cyclic program execution, hardware interrupt-controlled program execution.
Each priority class is assigned → organization blocks in which the user can program a
reaction. The OBs have different default priorities that determine the order in which they
are executed or interrupt each other if they occur simultaneously. The default priorities can
be changed by the user.
Process image
The signal states of the digital input and output modules are stored on the CPU in a process
image.
A distinction is made between the process image inputs and process image output. The
process image input (PII) is read from the input modules by the operating system before
execution of the user program. The process image output (PIQ) is transferred from the
operating system to the output modules at the end of the program execution.
Product version
The product version distinguishes products with the same order number. The product version
is incremented when upwards-compatible functional enhancements are made, when there
are modifications relating solely to production (use of new components) and when bugs are
fixed.

Glossary
PROFIBUS DP
Digital, analog and intelligent modules as well as a wide range of field devices according
to IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1, such as drives and valve terminals, are relocated from the
automation system to the local process, over a distance of up to 23 km.
The modules and field devices are connected to the automation system via the PROFIBUS DP
fieldbus and addressed like central I/Os.
Programming device
A programming device (PG) is a personal computer in a special compact design, suitable for
industrial conditions. A programming device is fully equipped for programming the SIMATIC
automation systems.
RC element
Series connection of ohmic resistor and capacitor. When a load is switched off, overvoltage
occurs in circuits with an inductive load, which can lead to an arc and reduce the service life
of the contacts. To extinguish this arc, the contact can be bridged by an RC element.
Reaction time
The reaction time is the time from detection of an input signal to the change of an output
signal linked to it.
The actual reaction time lies between the shortest and the longest reaction time. When
configuring a system, the longest reaction time must always be taken into account.
Reference channel error

Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. This parameter is used to enable the group
error signal of the reference junction when thermocouples are used. When thermocouples
are used, a reference channel error occurs in the following cases:
• A fault (e.g. wire break) occurs in a reference channel to which a thermal resistor (RTD) is
connected to compensate temperature drift (channel 0).
• The → reference temperature is outside the permissible value range.
Each input channel to which the reference junction "RTD on channel 0" is assigned has the
reference channel error in the case described above - the measured temperature is no longer
compensated.
Reference junction
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. This parameter is used to specify the
reference junction (location with known temperature) when using thermocouples. Reference
junctions can be: Resistance thermometer on channel 0 of the module; → compensating box,
→ reference temperature.

Glossary
Reference potential
Potential based on which the voltages of the circuits involved are examined and measured.
Reference temperature
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The reference temperature is the temperature
of the reference junction when thermocouples are used. The reference temperature enables
correct temperature measurement using thermocouples. The temperature of the reference
junction must be known, since a thermocouple always detects the temperature difference
between the measuring point and reference junction.
Repeatability
Repeatability is the maximum deviation of the measured/output values that occurs when the
same input signal is applied or the same output value is specified repeatedly. Repeatability
is in relation to the nominal range of the module and applies to the steady state of the
temperature.
Resolution
In analog modules, number of bits that represent the digitized analog value in binary form.
The resolution depends on the module and, in the case of analog input modules, on the
→ integration time. The longer the integration time, the more precise the resolution of the
measured value. The resolution can be up to 16 bits including sign.
Retentivity
Data areas in data blocks as well as timers, counters and bit memory are retentive if their
content is retained after a restart or power OFF.
S7 basic communication
Communication functions integrated in the CPU of SIMATIC S7/C7 that can be called by the
user. The functions are called in the user program with → system functions. The user data
length is up to 76 bytes (small amounts of data). S7 basic communication is realized via →
MPI.
S7 communication
Communication functions integrated in the CPU of SIMATIC S7/C7 that can be called by
the user. The functions are called in the user program with → system function blocks. The
user data length is up to 64 KB (large amounts of data). S7 communication provides a
network-independent interface between devices of SIMATIC S7/C7 and PG/PC type.
Segment
→ Bus segment

Glossary
Shunt
Low-resistance conductor connected in parallel in electric circuits.
Signal module
Signal modules (SMs) form the interface between the process and the automation system.
There are input modules, output modules, input/output modules (in each case, digital and
analog).
Smoothing
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The measured values are smoothed using
digital filtering. It is possible to choose between no, weak, medium and strong smoothing
for each individual module. The stronger the smoothing, the higher the time constant of the
digital filter.
Standard communication
Communication via standardized protocols such as PROFIBUS DP, PROFIBUS FMS.
Static data
Static data is data that is only used within a → function block. This data is stored in an
instance data block belonging to the function block. The data stored in this way is retained
until the next function block call.
Substitute value
Substitute values are values that are output to the process if a signal output module is
defective or that are used in the user program instead of a process value if a signal input
module is defective.
The substitute values can be configured by the user in STEP 7 (keep last value, substitute
value 0 or 1). They are the values that the output(s) are to output at CPU-STOP.
SYNC
Control command of the → master to the device: freezing of the outputs at their current
value.
System diagnostics
System diagnostics is the detection, evaluation and signaling of errors that occur within the
automation system. Examples of such errors are: Program errors or failures on modules.
System errors can be indicated with LED displays or in STEP 7.

Glossary
Temperature coefficient
Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when temperature is measured with a
resistance thermometer (RTD). The temperature coefficient is selected according to the
resistance thermometer used (according to DIN standard).
Temperature error
The temperature error is the drift of the measured/output values caused by changes in the
ambient temperature of the analog module. It is specified as a percentage per degree Kelvin
in relation to the nominal range of the analog module.
Temperature error of internal compensation

The temperature error of the internal compensation only occurs when measuring with
thermocouples. It indicates the error to be taken into account in addition to the actual
temperature error when "Internal comparison" mode is selected. The error is specified either
as a percentage in relation to the physical nominal range of the analog module or as an
absolute value in °C.
Temporary data
Temporary data is → local data of a block that is stored in the local data stack during
execution of a block and is no longer available on completion of execution.
Total current
Total of the currents of all output channels of a digital output module.
Unforce
→ Force
Ungrounded
Having no electrical connection to ground
Warm restart
Restart after a power failure, with a set of dynamic data programmed by the user and a user
program section defined in the system.
A warm restart is characterized by the setting of a status bit or other appropriate means that
can be read by the user program and that indicates that the shutdown of the automation
system due to power failure has been detected in RUN mode.

Glossary
Wire break
Parameter in STEP 7. A wire-break check is used to monitor the connection from the input
to the sensor or from the output to the actuator. In the event of a wire break, the module
detects a current flow at the correspondingly configured input/output.
Work memory
The work memory is a → RAM memory in the → CPU that is accessed by the processor during
execution of the user program.

Index
Analog input module
ADC-DAC error, 203
2 Auxiliary voltage missing, 203
Causes of error and remedies, 203
2-conductor connection, 191
Channel error, 203
2-wire transducer, 187
Channel information available, 203
Configuration error, 203
Connecting resistance thermometers, 190
3 Connecting resistors, 190
3-conductor connection, 190 Connecting sensors, 183
Connecting thermocouples, 192
Diagnostic data, 357
4 Diagnostic interrupt, 180
diagnostic message in measured value, 201
4-conductor connection, 190
Diagnostic messages, 201
4-wire transducer, 188
Diagnostics, 180
EPROM error, 203
External error, 203
A Front connector missing, 203
Abbreviations, 371 Hardware interrupt lost, 203
AC Incorrect parameters, 203
Meaning, 371 Internal error, 203
Accessories isolated, 183
Order numbers, 365 Limit, 180
S7-400, 365 Measurement, 180
ADC Measuring method, 180
Meaning, 371 Measuring range, 181
ADC-DAC error Measuring range module incorrect/missing, 203
Analog input module, 203 Module error, 203
Additional support, 4 No parameters, 203
Address area Noise suppression, 181
Setting, 324 non-isolated, 183
Addressing Overflow, 204
S5 modules, 317 Parameter assignment error, 203
AI Parameters, 180, 341
Meaning, 371 potential difference, 183
Ambient conditions, 25 RAM error, 203
Climatic, 26 Reference channel error, 204
IM 463-2, 315 Reference junction, 181
mechanical, 25 Reference temperature, 181
Analog functions Run time calibration error, 204
STEP 7 blocks, 143 Short-circuit to M, 203
Analog input channels SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 241
Basic execution time, 175 SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit, 207
Conversion time, 175 SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 215, 230
Cycle time, 175 SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 278
Measuring method, 168 SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 267
Measuring range, 168 SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 250
Representation of analog values, 148 Smoothing of analog input values, 175, 181

Index
STOP mode, 203 Australia

Structure of data record 1, 341 Marking, 17
Temperature coefficient, 181 Auxiliary voltage missing
temperature unit, 181 Analog input module, 203
Underflow, 204 Digital module, 85
Wire break, 203
Wire break monitoring, 180
Analog module B
Behavior, 171
Backplane bus, 50
Commissioning steps, 146
Backup battery, 47
Determination of the measuring error/output
Function, 47
error, 174
Technical specifications, 48
Diagnostics, 201
BAF
EXTF LED, 201
Meaning, 371
Interrupt, 205
Basic error limit, 174
INTF LED, 201
Basic execution time
Load voltage failure, 172
Analog input channels, 175
Parameter assignment, 178
Analog output channels, 177
Analog modules, 143
Basic knowledge required, 3
Diagnostic interrupt, 205
Battery, 24, 47
Analog output channel
Battery type, 47
Conversion time, 177
Battery voltage, 50
Response time, 178
Block diagram
Analog output channels
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 216, 231
Basic execution time, 177
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 292
Cycle time, 177
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 242
Analog output module
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 279
Connecting loads to a voltage output, 198
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 268
Connecting loads to current outputs, 200
SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 251
Connecting loads/actuators, 197
Buffer batteries
electrically isolated, 197
Shipping and storage conditions, 24
Output, 182
Storage, 24
Output range, 182
Buffer time, 48
Output type, 182
Calculating, 48
Parameters, 182
BUS1F; BUS2F
Response time, 177
Meaning, 371
Settling time, 177
Bytes 0 and 1
SM 432, AO 8 x 13 bit, 291
of diagnostic data, 344
Analog output modules
Properties, 145
Analog signals
Cables, 197
C
Analog value Cable
Converting, 146 Plug in, 320
Sign, 147 Prepare, 320
Analog-to-digital conversion, 175 Cable 721
AO Pin assignments, 327
Meaning, 371 Cable length
Area of application IM 463-2, 317
IM 463-2, 315 Selecting, 321
AS Cable length selector switch, 319
Meaning, 371

Index
Cables, 302 Configuration error

for analog signals, 183, 197 Analog input module, 203
Calculating Configuration in RUN, 80
Buffer time, 48 Configuration in RUN (CiR)
Calibration software, 268, 278 Changing, 178
Causes of error and remedies Configuration of analog output circuits
Analog input module, 203 SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 298
Digital module, 85 Connecting actuators
CCC marking, 15 to analog output module, 197
CE marking, 13 Connecting loads
Certifications, 13 to analog output module, 197
CH Connecting loads to a voltage output
Meaning, 371 to analog output module, 198
Change Connecting loads to current outputs
Fuse, 138 to analog output module, 200
Changing Connecting resistance thermometers
Configuration in RUN (CiR), 178 to analog input module, 190
Parameter assignment in the user program, 178 Connecting resistors
Rack number, 306 to analog input module, 190
Changing the fuse, 138 Connecting sensors
Channel error to analog input module, 183
Analog input module, 203 Connection
Digital module, 85 Compensating box, 195
Channel information available Connecting loads to current outputs, 200
Analog input module, 203 Electrically isolated sensors, 183
Digital module, 85 IM 463-2, 320
Check Non-isolated sensors, 185
Mechanical environmental conditions, 26 Resistance thermometers and resistors, 190
CiR, 80 rules, 301
Circuit diagram for SM 431; AI 8 x 13 bit, 208 Rules, 301
Climatic environmental conditions, 26 Thermocouples to resistance thermometers, 195
Commissioning analog modules Voltage sensors, 186
Steps, 146 Connection and circuit diagram
Commissioning digital modules SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC, 92
Steps, 79 SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 125, 129
Communication bus, 31 SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC, 96
COMP SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 106
Meaning, 371 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 113
Compensating SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 117
Reference junction temperature for SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 121
thermocouples, 193 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 135
Compensating box, 194 Connection diagram
Connecting, 195 SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit, 209
compensation SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 217, 232
external, 194 SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 293
Internal, 193, 194 SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 243
Conditions of use, 25 SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 270
Configurable diagnostic messages, 82 SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 280
Configuration SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 252
Interface modules, 299 Contact, direct, 369
S5 modules, 325

Index
Conversion time Rack, 29

Analog input channels, 175 UR1, 31
Analog output channel, 177 UR2-H, 34
Converting Destination CPU for interrupt
Analog values, 146 Digital output module, 82
Courses, 5 DI
Cover, 51 Meaning, 371
CP Diagnostic data
Meaning, 371 Analog input modules:, 357
CPU Bytes 0 and 1, 344
Meaning, 371 Data record, 343
CR Digital input modules, 345
Meaning, 371, 373 Evaluating, 343
CR2 of the digital output modules, 350
Design, 36 of the SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V, 345
Technical specifications, 37 Signal modules, 343
CR3 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 347
Design, 38 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A, 355
Technical specifications, 39 SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A, 350
cULus approval, 17 SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 352
Relay modules, 18 SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 359
Cycle time SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 357
Analog input channels, 175 SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 362
Analog output channels, 177 Diagnostic data entry, 173
Analog input module, 180
D Analog modules, 205
Digital modules, 87
DAC
Diagnostic message, 84
Meaning, 371
Channel error, 84
Data record
Channel information available, 84
for diagnostic data, 343
EPROM error, 84
for parameters, 333
External auxiliary voltage missing, 84
Data record 1
External error, 84
Analog input module design, 341
Front connector missing, 84
Digital input module configuration, 335
Fuse blown, 84
Digital output module design, 338
Hardware interrupt lost, 84
DB
Incorrect parameters, 84
Meaning, 371
Internal error, 84
DC
Internal voltage failure, 84
Meaning, 371
Load voltage L+ missing, 84
Definition
Module error, 84
Electrostatic sensitive devices, 367
No module parameters, 84
Degree of protection, 27
Parameter assignment error, 84
IP20, 27
Sensor supply missing, 84
Dependencies
Short-circuit to L+, 84
Input values, 103
Short-circuit to M, 84
Output values, 133
Wire break, 84
Design
Diagnostic messages, 83, 201
CR2, 36
Analog input modules:, 201
CR3, 38
Digital modules, 84
ER2, 41
Reading, 83, 201
Power supply, redundant, 45

Index
Diagnostics Module error, 85

Analog input module, 180 No parameters, 85
Analog modules, 201 Parameter assignment, 79
Digital input module, 81 Parameter assignment error, 85
Digital output module, 82 Sensor supply missing, 86
for digital modules, 82 Short-circuit to L+, 85
Diagnostics interrupt enable Short-circuit to M, 85
Digital input module, 81 STOP mode, 85
Digital output module, 82 Wire break, 86
Digital input module Digital output module
Diagnostic data, 345 Destination CPU for interrupt, 82
Diagnostics, 81 Diagnostic data, 350
Diagnostics interrupt enable, 81 Diagnostics, 82
Hardware interrupt enable, 81 Diagnostics interrupt enable, 82
Input delay, 81 Fuse blown, 82
Keep last value, 81 Keep last value, 82
Load voltage L+ missing, 81 Load voltage L+ missing, 82
Parameters, 81, 335 Parameters, 82, 338
Sensor supply missing, 81 Short-circuit to L+, 82
SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC, 94 Short-circuit to M, 82
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 112 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 134
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 105 SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 120
SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC, 91 SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 124, 127
SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 116 Structure of data record 1, 338
Structure of data record 1, 335 Substitute a value, 82
Substitute a value, 81 Substitute a value "1", 82
Substitute a value "1", 81 Wire break monitoring, 82
Wire break monitoring, 81 Digital output modules
Digital input modules Properties, 78
Properties, 77 Discharge of static electricity
Digital module Protective measures, 369
Auxiliary voltage missing, 85 Discharge, electrostatic
Causes of error and remedies, 85 Persons, 368
Channel error, 85 Displaying parameter assignment errors
Channel information available, 85 SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 276
Commissioning steps, 79 DO
Diagnostic messages, 84 Meaning, 371
Diagnostics, 82 Documentation package, 4
EPROM error, 85 Dynamic parameters, 79
External error, 85
EXTF LED, 83
Front connector missing, 85 E
Fuse blown, 86
Edge, 81
Hardware interrupt, 87
EEPROM
Hardware interrupt lost, 85, 88
Meaning, 371
Incorrect parameters, 85
Electrically isolated sensors, 183
Internal error, 85
Connecting, 183
Internal voltage failure, 85
Electromagnetic compatibility, 21
Interrupt, 87
Electrostatic sensitive devices
interrupt-triggering channels, 88
Definition, 367
INTF LED, 83
Load voltage L+ missing, 86

Index
EMC FM
Definition, 22 Approval, 19
Meaning, 371 Meaning, 371
EMC definition, 22 FOC
EMC directive, 15 Meaning, 372
Emission of radio frequency interference, 23 FRCE
Enabling Meaning, 371
Interrupt, 87, 205 Front connector missing
Ensuring Analog input module, 203
Wire break monitoring, 101, 109 Digital module, 85
EPROM, 371 Function
EPROM error Backup battery, 47
Analog input module, 203 IM 460-0 and IM 461-0, 304
Digital module, 85 IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 307
ER IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 311
Meaning, 371 Interface modules, 299
ER2 Operator controls, 51
Design, 41 Functions
Technical specifications, 42 Rack, 29
Error Fuse blown
of an analog module, 174 Digital module, 86
Error messages Digital output module, 82
Power supply modules, 52
ES
Meaning, 372 G
ESD
GD
Meaning, 371
Meaning, 372
Evaluating
Grounding, 369
EXM
Meaning, 371
External error
H
Analog input module, 203 Hardware interrupt
Digital module, 85 Digital modules, 87
EXTF End of scan cycle, 206
Meaning, 371 when limit is exceeded, 205
EXTF LED Hardware interrupt enable
Analog module, 201 Digital input module, 81
Digital module, 83 Hardware interrupt lost
Digital module, 85, 88
F HLV
Meaning, 372
Failure
Hotline, 5
Supply voltage, 103
FB
Meaning, 371
FC
I
Meaning, 371 I/O bus, 31
FEPROM IC
Meaning, 371 Meaning, 372

Index
ID Insulation test, 27
Meaning, 371 Interface
Module types, 344 Selecting, 320
IEC 61131-2, 13 Interface module
IFM1F; IFM2F IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 308
Meaning, 372 IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 311
IM Interface modules
Meaning, 372 Configuration, 299
IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 Function, 299
Function, 304 IM 460-0, 304
Operator controls and display elements, 304 IM 460-1, 308
Parameter assignment, 305 IM 460-3, 311
Technical specifications, 306 IM 461-0, 304
IM 460-1 and 461-1 IM 461-1, 308
Technical specifications, 310 IM 461-3, 311
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 Interface selector switch, 319
Function, 307 Interference
Operator controls and indicators, 308 pulse-shaped, 22
Parameter assignment, 309 sinusoidal, 23
IM 460-3 and 461-3 Interference frequency suppression 10 Hz
Technical specifications, 313 Step response, 287
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3 Interference frequency suppression 400 Hz
Function, 311 Step response, 288
Operator controls and display elements, 311 Interference frequency suppression 50 Hz
Parameter assignment, 312 Step response, 287
IM 463-2 Interference frequency suppression 60 Hz
Ambient conditions, 315 Step response, 288
Area of application, 315 Internal error
Cable 721, 327 Analog input module, 203
Cable length, 317 Digital module, 85
Connecting, 320 Internal voltage failure
EMI resistance, 315 Digital module, 85
Indicators, 318 Interrupt
LEDs, 319 Analog modules, 205
Operator controls, 318 Digital modules, 87
Order number, 315 Enabling, 87, 205
Rules for connecting, 317 Interrupt-triggering channels
Terminator, 329 of the digital module, 88
Incorrect parameters INTF
Analog input module, 203 Meaning, 372
Digital module, 85 INTF LED
Indicators, 49 Analog module, 201
IM 463-2, 318 Digital module, 83
Input characteristic curve to IEC 61131 IP
for digital inputs, 89 Meaning, 372
Input delay, 104 IP20, 27
Digital input module, 81
Input values
Dependencies, 103 K
Installation
Keep last value
Safety requirements, 21
Insulation resistance, 27
Digital output module, 82

Index
AI:, 371
AO:, 371
L AS:, 371
BAF:, 371
L+
BUS1F; BUS2F:, 371
Meaning, 372
CH:, 371
LAD
COMP:, 371
Meaning, 372
CP:, 371
LED
CPU:, 371
BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, 50
CR, 373
BAF, BATTF, 50
CR:, 371
Parameter assignment error, 261
DAC:, 371
LED displays
DB:, 371
BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, BATT INDIC on 1BATT, 55
DC:, 371
BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F; BATT.INDIC on 2BATT, 56
DI:, 371
BAF, BATTF, BATT INDIC on BATT, 55
DO:, 371
INTF, DC5V, DC24V, 52
EEPROM:, 371
LEDs, 50
EMC:, 371
IM 463-2, 319
EPROM:, 371
LEDs INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 50
ER:, 371
Limit
ES, 372
ESD:, 371
Line harmonics, 23
EXM:, 371
Load voltage failure
EXTF:, 371
of the analog module, 172
FB:, 371
Load voltage L+ missing
FC, 371
FC:, 371
Digital module, 86
FEPROM:, 371
FM:, 371
Low voltage directive, 15
FOC, 372
FRCE:, 371
GD, 372
M HLV, 372
M IC, 372
Meaning, 372 ID:, 371
M- IFM1F; IFM2F, 372
Meaning, 372 IM, 372
M+ INTF, 372
Meaning, 372 IP, 372
MANA L+, 372
Meaning, 372 LAD, 372
Manual M, 372
purpose, 3 M-, 372
Manual package, 4 M+, 372
Marine approvals, 21 MANA, 372
Marking MPI, 372
Australia, 17 MRES, 372
New Zeeland, 17 MSTR, 372
Meaning OB, 372
Abbreviations, 371, 372 OP, 372
AC:, 371 OS, 372
ADC:, 371 PG, 372

Index
PII, 372 SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 249

PIO, 372 SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 265
PLC, 372 SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 214
PS, 372 SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 229, 240
QI, 372 SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 290
QV, 372 Mechanical environmental conditions, 25
RAM, 372 check, 26
REDF, 372 Module error
RL, 372 Analog input module, 203
S +, 372 Digital module, 85
SCL, 372 Module overview, 144
SFB, 372 Digital modules, 77
SFC, 372 Module types
Sign, 373 ID, 344
SM, 372 Modules
SSL, 372 Shipping and storage conditions, 24
SSV:, 371 Storage, 24
STL:, 371 MPI
TD, 372 Meaning, 372
UC, 372 MRES
UCM, 372 Meaning, 372
UH, 373 MSTR
Uiso, 373 Meaning, 372
USR, 373
Vs, 373
Measured value resolution, 148 N
Measurement
Nameplate, 13
New Zeeland
Measuring method
Marking, 17
No parameters
Measuring methods
Digital module, 85
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 277
Noise suppression
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 248
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 263
Non-configurable diagnostic messages, 82
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 214
Non-isolated sensors, 184
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 226, 239
Connecting, 185
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 290
Measuring range
O
Measuring range module, 168 OB
Replugging, 169 Meaning, 372
Setting, 168 OB 40, 87, 205
Measuring range module incorrect/missing Start information, 206
Analog input module, 203 OB 82, 87, 205
Measuring range modules OP
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 247 Meaning, 372
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 259 Operating state
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 224, 236 the CPU, 172
Measuring ranges Operational limit, 174
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 277

Index
Operator controls, 49 6ES7 431-7KF00-0AB0, 278

Function, 51 6ES7 431-7KF10-0AB0, 267
IM 463-2, 318 6ES7 431-7QH00-0AB0, 250
Operator controls and display elements 6ES7 432-1HF00-0AB0, 291
IM 460-0 and IM 461-0, 304 6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0, 304
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 311 6ES7 460-1BA00-0AB0, 308
PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R, 70 6ES7 460-1BA01-0AB0, 308
PS 405 20A, 73 6ES7 460-3AA01-0AB0, 311
PS 405 4A, 67 6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0, 304
PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R, 61 6ES7 461-1BA00-0AA0, 308
PS 407 20A, 64 6ES7 461-1BA01-0AA0, 308
PS 407 4A, 58 6ES7 461-3AA01-0AA0, 311
Receive IM, 305, 312 IM 463-2, 315
Send IM, 305 Power supply module with redundant
Operator controls and indicators capability, 45
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 308 Order numbers
Receive IM, 309 Spare parts, 365
Send IM, 308, 312 OS
Optimum Meaning, 372
Signal propagation delays, 102 Output
Order number Analog output module, 182
6ES7 400-1JA01-0AA0, 31 Output of analog values
6ES7 400-1JA11-0AA0, 31 STEP 7 blocks, 143
6ES7 400-1TA01-0AA0, 31 Output range
6ES7 400-1TA11-0AA0, 31 Analog output module, 182
6ES7 400-2JA00-0AA0, 33 Output ranges
6ES7 400-2JA10-0AA0, 33 SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 298
6ES7 401-1DA01-0AA0, 38 Output type
6ES7 401-2TA01-0AA0, 36 Analog output module, 182
6ES7 403-1JA01-0AA0, 40 Output values
6ES7 403-1JA11-0AA0, 40 Dependencies, 133
6ES7 405-0KA02-0AA0, 70 Overflow
6ES7 405-0KR02-0AA0, 70 Analog input module, 204
6ES7 405-0RA02-0AA0, 73 Overload
6ES7 407-0DA02-0AA0, 58 at 24 V, 54
6ES7 407-0KA02-0AA0, 61 at 5 V, 54
6ES7 407-0KR02-0AA0, 61
6ES7 407-0RA02-0AA0, 64
6ES7 421-1BL01-0AA0, 91 P
6ES7 421-1EL00-0AA0, 116
6ES7 421-1FH20-0AA0, 112
Analog modules, 178
6ES7 421-7BH01-0AB0, 94
IM 460-0 and IM 461-0, 305
6ES7 421-7DH00-0AB0, 105
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1, 309
6ES7 422-1BH11-0AA0, 120
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3, 312
6ES7 422-1BL00-0AA0, 124
to digital modules, 79
6ES7 422-1FH00-0AA0, 134
User program, 333
6ES7 422-1HH00-0AA0, 139
Parameter assignment error
6ES7 422-7BL00-0AB0, 127
6ES7 431-0HH00-0AB0, 241
Digital module, 85
6ES7 431-1KF00-0AB0, 207
LED, 261
6ES7 431-1KF10-0AB0, 215
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 261
6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0, 230
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 289

Index
Parameters Power supply modules with redundant capability, 45

Analog input module, 180, 341 Power supply, redundant
Analog output module, 182 Design, 45
Data record, 333 Properties, 45
Digital input module, 81, 335 Prepare
Digital output module, 82, 338 Cable, 320
Dynamic, 79, 178 Properties
Editing in the user program, 79, 178 Analog output modules, 145
SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V, 101 Digital input modules, 77
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 109 Digital output modules, 78
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 132 Power supply modules, 43
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 274 Power supply, redundant, 45
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit, 247 Relay output module, 78
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 259 SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC, 94
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit, 213 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 112
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 224, 236 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 105
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit, 285 SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 116
SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit, 297 SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 120
Static, 79, 178 SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 124, 127
Parameters, modifiable, 333 SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit, 207
PARM_MOD SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 215, 230
SFC 57, 333 SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 278
PG SM 432, AO 8 x 13 bit, 291
Meaning, 372 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 134
PII SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A, 139
Meaning, 372 SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 241
Pin assignments SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 267
Cable 721, 327 SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 250
PIO Protection class, 27
Meaning, 372 Protective measures
Plant changes in runtime, 80 Avoiding contact, 369
PLC Discharge of static electricity, 369
Meaning, 372 Grounding, 369
Plug in PS
Cable, 320 Meaning, 372
potential difference PS 405 4A
with analog input modules, 183 Technical specifications, 68
Potential difference, 317 PS 407
Power supply module Technical specifications 10A, 62
Impermissible slot, 44 PS 407 10A R
PS 405 10A, 70 Technical specifications, 62
PS 405 10A R, 70 PS 407 20A
PS 405 4A, 67 PS 407 4A
PS 407 10A R, 61 PS 405 10A
PS 407 4A, 58 PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R
Power supply modules Operator controls and display elements, 70
Error messages, 52 PS 405 10A R
Properties, 43 Technical specifications, 71
Purpose, 43

Index
PS 405 20A Reduce

Operator controls and display elements, 73 vibrations, 25
PS 405 20A technical specifications, 74 Redundant operation, 45
PS 405 4A Reference channel error
Operator controls and display elements, 67 Analog input module, 204
PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R Testing, 266
Operator controls and display elements, 61 Reference junction
PS 407 20A Analog input module, 181
Operator controls and display elements, 64 Reference junction temperature for thermocouples
PS 407 4A Compensating, 193
Operator controls and display elements, 58 Reference temperature
Pulse-shaped interference, 22 Analog input module, 181
Purpose Relay modules
Power supply modules, 43 cULus approval, 18
Relay output module
Properties, 78
Q SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel.5 A, 139
Replugging
QI
Measuring range module, 169
Meaning, 372
Representation of analog value
QV
for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Climatic, 158
Meaning, 372
Representation of analog values, 146
Binary representation of input ranges, 149
binary representation of output ranges, 164
R for ±1 V to ±10 V voltage measuring range, 151
Rack for ±25 to ±500 V voltage measuring range, 151
CR2, 36 For analog input channels, 148
CR3, 38 for analog output channels, 164
Design, 29 for resistance thermometer Cu 10 Climatic, 158
ER2, 40 for resistance thermometer Cu 10 standard, 158
Functions, 29 for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Standard, 157
UR1, 31 for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Climatic, 156,
UR2, 31 157
UR2-H, 33 for resistance thermometers Pt 100, 200, 500,
Rack number 1000, 156
Changing, 306 for resistance-type sensors from 48 Ω to 6 kΩ, 155
Radio frequency interference for thermocouple type E, 159
Emission of, 23 for thermocouple type L, 161
RAM for thermocouple type N, 161
Meaning, 372 for thermocouple type T, 162
RAM error for thermocouple type U, 163
Analog input module, 203 for thermocouple types R, S, 162
Reading for thermocouples type B, 159
Diagnostic messages, 83, 201 for thermocouples type J, 160
Reading analog values for thermocouples type K, 160
STEP 7 blocks, 143 for voltage measuring ranges, 151
Receive IM for voltage output ranges, 166
Operator controls and display elements, 305, 312 for voltage output ranges ± 10 V, 166
Operator controls and indicators, 309 in current measuring ranges 0 to 20 mA, 153
REDF in current measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA, 154
Meaning, 372 in the 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA current output
ranges, 167

Index
in the 0 V to 10 V and 1 V to 5 V voltage measuring Sensors

ranges, 166 electrically isolated, 183
in the 1 V to 5 V and 0 V to 10 V voltage measuring Non-isolated, 184
ranges, 152 Setting
in the current output range ±20 mA, 167 Address area, 324
in the current output ranges, 167 Measuring range module, 168
Representation of analog values in the ±3.2 mA to S5 expansion unit, 323
±20 mA current measuring ranges, 153 Settling time, 177
Resistance measurement SFB
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit, 228, 240 Meaning, 372
Resistance thermometers and resistors SFC
Connecting, 190 Meaning, 372
Resolution, 147 SFC 51, 87, 205
Response time, 177, 178 SFC 55 WR_PARM, 333
RL SFC 56 WR_DPARM, 333
Meaning, 372 SFC 57 PARM_MOD, 333
Rules SFC 59, 87, 205
Connection, 301 Short-circuit
Run time calibration error Vs Sensor supply, 103
Analog input module, 204 Short-circuit to L+
Digital module, 85
S Short-circuit to M
S-
Digital module, 85
Meaning, 372
S+
Sign
Meaning, 372
Analog value, 147
S5 expansion unit
Meaning, 373
Setting, 323
Signal modules
S5 modules
Addressing, 317
Signal propagation delays
Configuration, 325
Optimum, 102, 110
S7-400
Sinusoidal interference, 23
Accessories, 365
SM
Spare parts, 365
Meaning, 372
Safety requirements
SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC
Installation, 21
Properties, 94
SCL
Meaning, 372
SM 421, DI 16 x DC 24 V
Scope
of the manual, 3
Parameters, 101
Selecting
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V
Cable length, 321
Properties, 112
Interface, 320
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Send IM
Operator controls and display elements, 305
Properties, 105
Operator controls and indicators, 308, 312
SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC
Sensor
Connection and circuit diagram, 92
Supply voltage, 187
Sensor supply missing
SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V
Properties, 116
Digital module, 86

Index
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V Measuring range modules, 224, 236

Parameters, 109 Measuring ranges, 229, 240
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 20-120 V/2 A Parameters, 224, 236
Diagnostic data, 355 Resistance measurement, 228, 240
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 20-125 V/1.5 A SM 431, AI 8 x 16 Bit
Diagnostic data, 350 Diagnostic data, 362
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A Measuring methods, 290
Properties, 120 Measuring ranges, 290
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A Parameter assignment error, 289
Connection and circuit diagram, 125, 129 Parameters, 285
Diagnostic data, 352 SM 432, AO 8 x 13 bit
Properties, 124, 127 Properties, 291
Technical specifications, 126, 130 SM 432, AO 8 x 13 Bit
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A Configuration of analog output circuits, 298
Parameters, 132 Output ranges, 298
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit Parameters, 297
Block diagram, 208 SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC
Connection diagram, 209 Connection and circuit diagram, 96
Properties, 207 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V
Technical specifications, 210 Connection and circuit diagram, 113
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V
Block diagram, 216, 231 Connection and circuit diagram, 106
Connection diagram, 217, 232 Technical specifications, 107
Properties, 215, 230 SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V
Technical specifications, 218, 233 Technical specifications, 114
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120
Properties, 278 Connection and circuit diagram, 117
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V
Diagnostic data, 359 Technical specifications, 118
Displaying parameter assignment errors, 276 SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A
Measuring methods, 277 Properties, 134
Measuring ranges, 277 SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A
Parameters, 274 Connection and circuit diagram, 121
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 Bit Technical specifications, 122
Measuring methods, 248 SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A
Measuring range modules, 247 Technical specifications, 141
Measuring ranges, 249 SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A
Parameters, 247 Properties, 139
SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A
Diagnostic data, 357 Connection and circuit diagram, 135
Measuring methods, 263 Technical specifications, 136
Measuring range modules, 259 SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit
Measuring ranges, 265 Block diagram, 292
Parameter assignment error, 261 Connection diagram, 293
Parameters, 259 Technical specifications, 294
Wire break monitoring, 266 SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 Bit Block diagram, 242
Measuring methods, 214 Connection diagram, 243
Measuring ranges, 214 Properties, 241
Parameters, 213 Technical specifications, 244
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 Bit SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit
Measuring methods, 226, 239 Block diagram, 279

Index
Connection diagram, 280

SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit T
Block diagram, 268
TD
Meaning, 372
Properties, 267
Technical specifications
Backup battery, 48
SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit
CR2, 37
Block diagram, 251
CR3, 39
ER2, 42
Properties, 250
IM 460-0 and 461-0, 306
IM 460-1 and 461-1, 310
Smoothing of analog input values, 175
IM 460-3 and 461-3, 313
PS 405 10A, 71
Spare parts
PS 405 10A R, 71
Order numbers, 365
PS 405 20A, 74
S7-400, 365
PS 405 4A, 68
SSL
PS 407 10A, 62
Meaning, 372
PS 407 10A R, 62
Standards, 13
PS 407 20A, 65
Start information
PS 407 4A, 59
OB 40, 206
SM 421, DI 16 x 24 V DC, 98
Static parameters, 79
SM 421, DI 32 x 24 V DC, 93
STEP 7 blocks
SM 422, DO 32 x DC 24 V/0.5 A, 126, 130
for analog functions, 143
SM 431, AI 8 x 13 bit, 210
Step response
SM 431, AI 8 x 14 bit, 218, 233
Interference frequency suppression 10 Hz, 287
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 24/60 V, 107
SM 421, DI 16 x UC 120/230 V, 114
SM 421, DI 32 x UC 120 V, 118
SM 422, DO 16 x DC 24 V/2 A, 122
STL
SM 422, DO 16 x UC 30/230 V/Rel. 5 A, 141
Meaning, 371
SM 422, DO 16 x AC 120/230 V/2 A, 136
STOP mode
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 294
SM 431, AI 16 x 13 bit, 244
Digital module, 85
SM 431, AI 8 x 16 bit, 281
Storage, 24
SM 431, AI 8 x RTD x 16 bit, 271
Buffer batteries, 24
SM 431; AI 16 x 16 bit, 253
Modules, 24
UR1, 32
Substitute a value
UR2, 32
UR2-H, 35
Technical support, 5
Substitute a value "1"
Temperature coefficient
temperature unit
Supply voltage
Failure, 103
Terminator, 301
Sensor, 187
IM 463-2, 329
support
Test voltages, 27
Additional, 4
Testing
SV
Reference channel error, 266
Meaning, 371
Underflow, 267
Thermal voltage, 192

Index
Thermocouple Wire break monitoring

Connecting to an analog input module, 192 Analog input module, 180
Design, 192 Digital input module, 81
Operating principle, 192 Digital output module, 82
Thermocouples to resistance thermometers Ensuring, 101, 109
Connecting, 195 SM 431, AI 16 x 16 Bit, 266
Training center, 5 WR_DPARM
Transport, 24 SFC 56, 333
WR_PARM
SFC 55, 333
U
UC
Meaning, 372
UCM
Meaning, 372
UH
Meaning, 373
Uiso
Meaning, 373
Underflow
Testing, 267
UR1
Design, 31
UR2
UR2-H
Design, 34
User program
Parameter assignment, 333
USR
Meaning, 373
V
Vibrations, 25
Voltage sensors
Connecting, 186
Vs
Meaning, 373
Vs Sensor supply
Short-circuit, 103
W
Wire break
Digital module, 86


s7 400 Module Data en-US en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

s7 400 Module Data en-US en-US

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

s7 400 Module Data en-US en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Accessories and spare parts C

Siemens AG A5E00850736-AL Copyright © Siemens AG 2023.

Purpose of this manual

Basic knowledge required

Scope of the manual

Changes compared to the previous version

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Position in the information landscape

System Documentation package

Recycling and disposal

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Service & Support on the Internet

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

4.3.1 Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 79

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

5.6 Behavior of the analog modules ....................................................................................... 171

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

C Accessories and spare parts............................................................................................................... 365

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Information on the nameplate

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Table 1-1 Use in industry

Area of applica‐ Noise emission requirements Noise immunity requirements

Low voltage directive

Name Order number

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

ATEX approvals DEKRA 17ATEX0079 X, DEKRA 21ATEX0010 X, and DEKRA 21ATEX0049 X

Type examination certificate num‐ DEKRA 17ATEX0079 X DEKRA DEKRA

Certificate number IECEx DEK 17.0039 X IECEx DEK IECEx DEK

Special conditions in potentially explosive atmospheres (applies to UKEX/CCC/ATEX/

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Marking for Australia and New Zealand

Our products meet the requirements of standard EN 61000-6-4.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., complying with

or cULus approval, Hazardous Location

CULUS Listed E248953 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

or cULus Approvals, Hazardous Location for Relay Modules

CULUS Listed E223122 INT. CONT. EQ. FOR HAZ. LOC.

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

(1) Battery or supply voltage

The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics of this connection:

Voc (no load voltage) = 15 V Vmax = 15 V

Battery/Power supply CPU input "Ext. Batt." with cable

Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I, Division 2,

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Temperature class: T4 at 60° C ambient temperature

(1) Battery or supply voltage

The following conditions apply to the performance characteristics of this connection:

Voc (no load voltage) = 15 V Vmax = 15 V

Battery/power supply CPU input "Ext. Batt." with cable

S7-400 Automation System Module Data

Safety requirements for installation

1.2 Electromagnetic compatibility